MODEM KOAD CONSTRUCTION 
 
 A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE ENGINEERING PROBLEMS OF 
 ROAD BUILDING, WITH CAREFULLY COMPILED SPECI- 
 FICATIONS FOR MODERN HIGHWAYS, AND 
 CITY STREETS AND BOULEVARDS 
 
 AUSTIN T. BYRNE 
 
 CIVIL ENGINEER 
 
 AUTHOR OF 
 
 'HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION," "MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP' 
 
 ILLUSTRATED 
 
 AMERICAN TECHNICAL SOCIETY 
 
 CHICAGO 
 
 1917 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1917, BY 
 
 AMERICAN TECHNICAL SOCIETY 
 
 COPYRIGHTED IN GREAT BRITAIN 
 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 THE science of good road building is an old one as evidenced 
 by the many highways in Europe which have withstood the 
 wear of travel for centuries. Most of these famous roads were 
 cut from solid rock or built of crushed stone of such a character 
 as to be unaffected by weather conditions. Modern road building, 
 however, has been largely influenced within the past fifteen years 
 by the enormous increase in the amount of travel due to the auto- 
 mobile. This has not only been the means of developing new road 
 surface to meet the more severe requirements of this type of vehicle 
 but it has developed a country-wide interest in good roads, thus 
 making it possible for the enthusiastic travelers to take long tours 
 without meeting the formerly ever-present bugaboo of bad roads, 
 besides making the ordinary town-to-town travel more satisfactory. 
 
 <I It is with the idea of giving a clear conception of the engineering 
 problems involved in road building, that is, laying out of the road 
 by the best and easiest route, the questions of grade, contour, 
 and drainage, and the construction of culverts and bridges, that 
 this treatise has been written. The author has had long experience 
 in the field of highway construction and has treated the different 
 types of roads in a very complete and practical manner. Natural 
 soil, gravel, broken stone, bituminous macadam and concrete 
 roads are all carefully treated, not only as to material, but as to the 
 best methods of laying them. The city pavements are also given 
 due consideration, accompanied by typical specifications for the 
 new surfaces developed for boulevards. 
 
 <I Altogether, the article covers the entire field of road building, 
 both city and country, and should appeal either to the highway 
 engineer or to the untrained reader who has merely a passing 
 interest in the subject. 
 
 365550 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 COUNTRY ROADS AND BOULEVARDS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Resistance to movement of vehicles 1 
 
 Resistance to traction 1 
 
 Tractive power and gradients ." 7 
 
 Axle friction 11 
 
 Resistance of air 12 
 
 Location of roads 12 
 
 Reconnoissance 13 
 
 Preliminary survey 15 
 
 Topography 15 
 
 Map 20 
 
 Memoir 22 
 
 Bridge sites 22 
 
 Final selection of route 22 
 
 Preliminary road construction methods. . 35 
 
 Width and transverse contour 35 
 
 Drainage 38 
 
 Types of drainage 38 
 
 Nature of soils 39 
 
 Location of drains 39 
 
 Proper fall for drains 40 
 
 Materials used for drains 40 
 
 Sizes of drams 42 
 
 Silt basins 42 
 
 Protection of drain ends from weather 42 
 
 Drain outlets. 43 
 
 Side ditches 43 
 
 Treatment of springs found in cuttings 44 
 
 Drainage for hillside roads 45 
 
 Inner and outer road gutters 45 
 
 Culverts 46 
 
 Earthenware pipe culverts 49 
 
 Iron pipe culverts. . . 51 
 
 Box culverts 52 
 
 Arch culverts 53 
 
 Short span bridges used as culverts 53 
 
 Earthwork 55 
 
 Balancing cuts and fills 55 
 
 Side slopes 55 
 
 Shrinkage of earthwork 57 
 
 Prosecution of earthwork 58 
 
 Methods of forming embankments 58 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 Preliminary road construction methods (Continued) PAGE 
 
 Tools for construction work 60 
 
 Natural-soil roads 74 
 
 Earth roads 74 
 
 Sand roads 77 
 
 Sand-clay roads 77 
 
 Application of oil to sand and gravel soils 78 
 
 Roads with special coverings 79 
 
 Foundations 79 
 
 Materials 79 
 
 Thickness 79 
 
 Types of foundation to be used '. 81 
 
 Wearing surfaces 82 
 
 Maintenance and improvement of roads 109 
 
 Repair and maintenance of broken-stone roads 109 
 
 Systems of maintenance 1 10 
 
 Improvement of existing roads 110 
 
 Traffic census Ill 
 
 CITY STREETS AND HIGHWAYS 
 Foundations ' 121 
 
 Stone-block pavements , 123 
 
 Materials 124 
 
 Cobblestone pavement 125 
 
 Belgian-block pavement 125 
 
 Granite-block pavement 126 
 
 Blocks .' ,.... 127 
 
 Manner of laying blocks 127 
 
 Foundation 129 
 
 Cushion coat 129 
 
 Laying blocks 130 
 
 Ramming 130 
 
 Fillings for joints 130 
 
 Stone pavement on steep grades 132 
 
 Brick pavements 133 
 
 Qualifications of brick 133 
 
 Tests for paving brick 136 
 
 Brick-pavement qualifications 137 
 
 Foundation 137 
 
 Sand cushion 137 
 
 Manner of laying 138 
 
 Joint fillings 139 
 
 Tools used by hand in the construction of block pavements 145 
 
 Concrete-mixing machine 145 
 
 Gravel heaters. . 146 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Wood-block pavements 147 
 
 Creosoting 147 
 
 Laying the blocks 149 
 
 Qualifications of wood pavements 152 
 
 Asphalt pavements 153 
 
 Sheet-asphalt pavement 153 
 
 Laying the pavement. . 155 
 
 Foundation 157 
 
 Qualifications of asphalt pavements 157 
 
 Failure of asphalt pavement 159 
 
 Rock asphalt pavement 161 
 
 Asphalt blocks ! 161 
 
 Tools employed in construction of asphalt pavements. 162 
 
 Miscellaneous pavements '164 
 
 Burnt clay 164 
 
 Straw 164 
 
 Oyster-shell 164 
 
 Chert 164 
 
 Slag 164 
 
 Clinker 165 
 
 Petrolithic 165 
 
 Kleinpflaster 165 
 
 Iron 165 
 
 Trackways 165 
 
 National pavement 166 
 
 Filbered asphalt pavement 166 
 
 Miscellaneous street work 166 
 
 Curbstones and gutters 170 
 
 Curbstones 170 
 
 Combination curb and gutter 171 
 
 Street cleaning 172 
 
 Cleaning methods 172 
 
 Removal of snow 175 
 
 Street sprinkling 176 
 
 Selecting the pavement 176 
 
 Qualifications 176 
 
 Interests affected 177 
 
 Problem involved in selection 177 
 
 Economic benefit 181 
 
 Relative economies. \ 181 
 
 Gross cost of pavements 184 
 
 Comparative rank of pavements 185 
 
 Specifications 185 
 
 Contracts . . ... 187 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 PART I 
 
 COUNTRY ROADS AND BOULEVARDS 
 
 RESISTANCE TO MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES 
 
 The object of a road is to provide a way for the transportation 
 of persons and goods from one place to another with the least 
 expenditure of power and expense. The facility with which this 
 traffic or transportation may be conducted over any given road 
 depends upon the resistance offered to the movement of vehicles. 
 This resistance is composed of: (1) resistance offered by the road- 
 way, which consists of (a) "friction" between the surface of the 
 road and the wheel tires, (b) resistance offered to the rolling of 
 the wheels occasioned by the want of uniformity in the road surface 
 or lack of strength to resist the penetrating efforts of loaded wheels, 
 (c) resistance due to gravity called "grade resistance"; (2) resistance 
 offered by vehicles, termed "axle friction"; and (3) resistance of 
 the air. The magnitude of each of the components has a wide 
 range, varying with the kind and condition of the road and its 
 surface, the form and condition of the vehicle, the load, and the 
 speed. 
 
 Resistance to Traction. The combination of road resistances 
 is designated by the general term "resistance to traction", the 
 magnitude of which is measured by the number of pounds of effort 
 per ton of the load required to overcome it; this is ascertained by 
 a form of spring-balance variously called "dynograph", "tracto- 
 graph", etc., one end of which is attached to the vehicles and the 
 other end to the draft animals. 
 
 The road which offers the least resistance to traffic should 
 combine a surface on which the friction of the wheels is reduced 
 to the least possible amount, while possessing sufficient roughness 
 to afford good foothold for the draft animals and good adhesion 
 for motor vehicles; and should be so located as to give the most 
 direct route with the least gradients. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE I 
 Resistance to Traction on Different Road Surfaces 
 
 ROAD SURFACE 
 
 V 
 
 TRACTION RESISTANCE 
 
 Pounds per Ton 
 
 In Terms of Load 
 
 Earth road ordinary condition 
 Gravel 
 Sand 
 Macadam 
 Plank road 
 Steel wheelway 
 
 50 to 200 
 50 to 100 
 100 to 200 
 30 to 100 
 30 to 50 
 15 to 40 
 
 4 T tO A 
 4*0- tO 2*0 
 
 ^0 tO T"O 
 17 tO. ^5 
 
 iV to^ 
 ik tO rif 
 
 Friction. The resistance of friction arises from the rubbing 
 of the wheel tires against the surface of the road; its amount can 
 be determined only by experiment for each kind of road surface. 
 From many experiments the following deductions are drawn: 
 
 (1) The resistance to traction is directly proportional to the pressure. 
 
 (2) On solid unyielding surfaces, the resistance is independent of the 
 width of the tire; but on compressible surfaces it decreases as the width of the 
 tire increases. There is no material advantage gained, however, in making 
 a tire more than 4 inches wide, for the reason that it is impossible to distribute 
 the load evenly over the road owing to the irregularities and curvatures of its 
 surface. 
 
 (3) On uniformly smooth surfaces, the resistance is independent of the 
 speed. 
 
 (4) On rough irregular surfaces, which give rise to constant concussion, 
 the resistance increases with the speed. 
 
 Table I shows the relative resistance to traction of various 
 surfaces. These coefficients refer to the power required to keep the 
 load in motion. It requires from two to six or eight times as much 
 force to start a load as it does to keep it in motion at two or three 
 miles per hour. The extra force required to start a load is due in 
 part to the fact that during the stop the wheel may settle into the 
 road surface; in part to the fact that the axle friction at starting 
 is greater than after motion has begun; and in part to the fact 
 that energy is consumed in accelerating the load. 
 
 Resistance to Rolling. Resistance to rolling is caused partly 
 by the wheel penetrating or sinking below the surface of the road, 
 forming a depression or rut, as shown in Fig. 1, thus compelling 
 the wheel to be continually rolling up a short incline. The measure 
 of this resistance is the horizontal force necessary at the axle to 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 roll it up the incline; and is equal to the product of the load multi- 
 plied by one-third of the semi-chord of the submerged arc of the 
 wheel. 
 
 Resistance to rolling is also caused by the wheel striking or 
 colliding with loose or projecting stones, which suddenly checks 
 
 Road Surface 
 
 fJl Rest 3 
 
 Natural Soil/ ^Rood Covering 
 
 Fig. 1. Exaggerated Section of Road under Pressure of Loaded Vehicle 
 
 the motive power; the momentum thus destroyed varies with the 
 height of the stone or obstacle and is often considerable. 
 
 In both cases the power required to overcome the resistance 
 is affected largely by the diameter of the wheel, as the larger the 
 wheel the less force is required to lift it over the obstruction or 
 to roll it up the inclination due 
 to the indentation of the sur- 
 face. 
 
 Illustrative Example. The 
 power required to draw a wheel 
 over ^a stone or any obstacle, 
 such as S in Fig. 2, may be thus 
 calculated : 
 
 Let P represent the power 
 sought, or that which would 
 just balance the weight on the 
 point of the stone, and the slightest increase of which would draw 
 it over. This power acts in the direction CP with the leverage of 
 BC or DE. The force of gravity W resists in the direction 
 CB with the leverage BD. The equation of equilibrium will be 
 PXCB = WXBD, whence 
 
 R 5 
 
 Fig. 2. Diagram for Calculating Power 
 
 Required to Draw Wheel over 
 
 Resisting Object 
 
 BD = 
 
 CB CA 
 
 AB 
 
4 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Let the radius of the wheel equal CD = 26 inches, and the height 
 of the obstacle equal AB = 4: inches. Let the weight 11' = 500 
 pounds, of which 200 pounds may be the weight of the wheel and 
 300 pounds the load on the axle. The formula then becomes 
 
 p gnn V676-484 rm 13.85 
 P = 500 - =500 =314.7 Ib. 
 2o 4 22 
 
 The pressure at the point D is compounded of the weight and the 
 power, and equals 
 
 CD 26 
 
 H/ li =500x l= 5911b - 
 
 Therefore this pressure acts with this great effect to destroy the road 
 in its collision with the stone; in addition there is to be considered 
 the effect of the blow given by the wheel in descending from it. 
 For minute accuracy the non-horizontal direction of % the draft and 
 the thickness of the axle should be taken into account. The power 
 required is lessened by proper springs to vehicles, by enlarged wheels, 
 and by making the line of draft ascending. 
 
 Illustrative Example. The mechanical advantage of the wheel 
 in surmounting an obstacle may be computed from the principle 
 
 of the lever. Let the wheel, 
 Fig. 3, touch the horizontal line 
 of traction in the point A and 
 meet a protuberance ED. Sup- 
 pose the line of draft CP to be 
 parallel to AB. Join CD and 
 draw the perpendiculars DE and 
 DF. We may suppose the power 
 
 Fig. 3. Force Diagram for Wheel Drawn to be applied at E and the Weight 
 
 over Obstacle ,, . ,1 (1 
 
 at F, and the action is then the 
 
 same as the bent lever EDF turning round the fulcrum at D. Hence 
 P : W :: FD : DE. But FD : DE :: tan FCD : 1 ; and tan FCD = 
 tan 2 DA B; therefore P = Wtsm2DAB. Now it is obvious that the 
 angle DAB increases as the radius of the circle diminishes; there- 
 fore, the weight W being constant, the power required to overcome 
 an obstacle of given height is diminished when the diameter is 
 increased. Large wheels are, therefore, the best adapted for sur- 
 mounting inequalities of the road. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE II 
 Resistance Due to Gravity on Different Inclinations 
 
 Grade 1 inch 
 
 20 
 
 30 
 
 40 
 
 50 
 
 60 
 
 ' 70 
 
 80 
 
 90 
 
 100 
 
 200 
 
 300 
 
 400 
 
 Rise in feet per mile 
 
 264 
 
 176 
 
 132 
 
 105 
 
 88 
 
 75 
 
 66 
 
 58 
 
 52 
 
 26 
 
 17 
 
 13 
 
 Resistance in pounds 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 per ton 
 
 100 
 
 66$ 
 
 50 
 
 40 
 
 33f 
 
 28| 
 
 25 
 
 221 
 
 20 
 
 10 
 
 6f 
 
 5 
 
 There are, however, circumstances which provide limits to 
 the height of the wheels of vehicles. If the radius AC exceeds 
 the height of that part of the horse to which the traces are attached, 
 the line of traction CP will be inclined to the horse, and part of the 
 power will be exerted in pressing the wheel against the ground. 
 The best average size of wheels is considered to be about 6 feet in 
 diameter. Wheels of large diameter do less damage to a road than 
 small ones, and cause less draft for the horses. With the same load, 
 a two-wheeled cart does far more damage than one with four wheels, 
 and this because of their sudden and irregular twisting motion in 
 the trackway. 
 
 Grade Resistance. Grade resistance is due to the action of 
 gravity, and is the same on good and bad roads. On level roads 
 its effect is immaterial, as it acts in a direction perpendicular to 
 the plane of the horizon and neither accelerates nor retards motion. 
 On inclined roads it offers considerable resistance, proportional to 
 the steepness of the incline. The resistance due to gravity on any 
 incline in pounds per ton is equal to 
 
 2000 
 rate of grade 
 
 Table II shows the resistance due to gravity on different grades. 
 The additional resistance caused by inclines may be investigated 
 in the following illustrated example. 
 
 Illustrative Example. Suppose the whole weight to be borne 
 on one pair of wheels, and that the tractive force is applied in a 
 direction parallel to the surface of the road. 
 
 Let AB, Fig. 4, represent a portion of the inclined road, C 
 being a vehicle just sustained in its position by a force acting in the 
 direction CD. It is evident that the vehicle is kept in its position 
 by three forces : namely, by its own weight W acting in the vertical 
 direction CF; by the force F applied in the direction CD parallel 
 
6 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Fig. 4. Forces Acting on Vehicle When 
 Drawn up Inclined. Road 
 
 to the surface of the road; and by the pressure P which the vehicle 
 exerts against the surface of the road acting in the direction CE 
 perpendicular to the same. * To determine the relative magnitude 
 of these three forces, draw the horizontal line AG and the vertical 
 line BG; then, since the two lines CF and BG are parallel and are 
 both cut by the line AB, they must make the two angles CFE and 
 ABG equal; also the two angles CEF and AGE are equal; there- 
 fore, the remaining angles FCE and BAG are. equal, and the two 
 triangles CFE and ABG are similar. And as the three sides of 
 
 the former are proportional to 
 the three forces by which the 
 vehicle is sustained, so also 
 are the three sides of the lat- 
 ter; namely, the length of the 
 road AB is proportional to 
 W, or the weight of the 
 vehicle; the vertical rise BG 
 is proportional to F, or the 
 force required to sustain the 
 vehicle on the incline; and the horizontal distance AG in which 
 the rise occurs is proportional to P, or the force with which the 
 vehicle presses upon the surface of the road. Therefore, 
 
 W : AB : : F : GB 
 and 
 
 W : AB : : P : AG 
 
 If to AG such a value be assigned that the vertical rise of the 
 road is exactly one foot, then 
 
 W W 
 
 and 
 
 in which A is the angle BAG. 
 
 To find the force requisite to sustain a vehicle upon an inclined road 
 (the effects of friction being neglected), divide the weight of the vehicle 
 and its load by the inclined length of the road, the vertical rise of 
 which is one foot, and the quotient is the force required. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE III 
 Tractive Power of Horses at Different Velocities 
 
 MILES PER HOUR 
 
 TRACTIVE FORCE 
 db.) 
 
 MILES PER HOUR 
 
 TRACTIVE FORCE 
 (lb.) 
 
 I 
 
 333.33 
 
 21 
 
 111.11 
 
 
 250 
 
 2 
 
 100 
 
 11 
 
 200 
 
 2| 
 
 90.91 
 
 H 
 
 166.66 
 
 3 
 
 83.33 
 
 if 
 
 142.86 
 
 3 
 
 71.43 
 
 2 
 
 125 
 
 4 
 
 62.50 
 
 To find the pressure of a vehicle against the surface of an inclined 
 road, multiply the weight of the loaded vehicle by the horizontal 
 length of the road, and divide the product by the inclined length 
 of the same; the quotient is the pressure required. The force 
 with which a vehicle presses upon an inclined road is always less 
 than its actual weight; the difference is so small that, unless the 
 inclination is very steep, it may be taken equal to the weight of the 
 loaded vehicle. 
 
 To find the resistance to traction in passing up or down an incline, 
 ascertain the resistance on a level road having the same surface as 
 the incline, to which add, if the vehicle ascends, or subtract, if 
 it descends, the force requisite to sustain it on the incline; the sum 
 or difference, as the case may be, will express the resistance. 
 
 Tractive Power and Gradients. Although transportation by 
 mechanically propelled vehicles will continue to increase, it is not 
 probable that for many years it will become more important than 
 traffic drawn by animals; and as mechanically propelled vehicles 
 can ascend any grade feasible for animals, it is only necessary to 
 discuss the effect of grades on horse-drawn traffic. 
 
 Tractive Power of Horses. The necessity for easy grades is 
 dependent upon the power of the horse to overcome the resistance 
 to motion, which is composed of four forces, viz, friction, collision, 
 gravity, and resistance of air. All estimates on the tractive power 
 of horses must to a certain extent be vague, owing to the different 
 strengths and speeds of animals of the same kind, as well as to the 
 extent of their training to any particular kind of work. 
 
 The draft or pull which a good average horse, weighing 1,200 
 pounds, can exert on a level, smooth road at a speed of 2 J miles per 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE IV 
 Variation of Tractive Power with Time 
 
 HOURS PER DAY 
 
 TRACTIVE FORCE 
 db.) 
 
 HOURS PER DAY 
 
 TRACTIVE FORCE 
 
 db.) 
 
 10 
 
 100 
 
 7 
 
 146$ 
 
 9 
 
 111* 
 
 6 
 
 166| 
 
 8 
 
 125 
 
 5 
 
 200 
 
 NOTE: The tractive power of teams may be found by multiplying the 
 above values by the following constants: 
 
 1 horse =1 
 
 2 horses 0.95X2 = 1.90 
 
 3 horses 0.85X3=2.55 
 
 4 horses 0.80X4 = 3.20 
 
 hour is 100 pounds; which is equivalent to 22,000 foot-pounds per 
 minute, or 13,200,000 foot-pounds per day of 10 hours. The tractive 
 power diminishes as the speed increases and, perhaps, within 
 certain limits, say from f mile to 4 miles per hour, nearly in inverse 
 proportion to it. Thus the average tractive force of a horse, on a 
 level, and actually pulling for 10 hours, may be assumed approx- 
 imately as shown in Table III. 
 
 The work done by a horse is greatest when the velocity with 
 which he moves is one-eighth of the greatest velocity with which 
 he can move when unloaded; and the force thus exerted is 0.45 
 of the utmost force that he can exert at a dead pull. The tractive 
 power of a horse may be increased in about the same proportion 
 as the time is diminished, so that when working from 5 to 10 hours 
 on a level, it will be about as shown in Table IV. 
 
 Loss of Tractive Power on Inclines. In ascending inclines a 
 horse's power diminishes rapidly; a large portion of his strength is 
 expended in overcoming the resistance of gravity due to his own 
 weight and that of the load. Table V shows that as the steepness 
 of the grade increases, the efficiency of both the horse and the road 
 surface diminishes; that the more of the horse's energy which is 
 expended in overcoming gravity, the less remains to overcome the 
 surface resistance. 
 
 Table VI shows the gross load which an average horse, weighing 
 1,200 pounds, can draw on different kinds of road surfaces, on a 
 level and on grades rising 5 and 10 feet per 100 feet. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE V 
 
 Effects of Grades upon the Load a Horse Can Draw on Different 
 
 Pavements 
 
 GRADE 
 
 EARTH 
 
 BROKEN STONE 
 
 STONE BLOCKS 
 
 ASPHALT 
 
 Level 
 
 1.00 
 
 1.00 
 
 1.00 
 
 1.00 
 
 1 100 
 
 .80 
 
 .66 
 
 .72 
 
 .41 
 
 2 100 
 
 .66 
 
 .50 
 
 .55 
 
 .25 
 
 3 100 
 
 .55 
 
 .40 
 
 .44 
 
 .18 
 
 4 100 
 
 .47 
 
 .33 
 
 .36 
 
 .13 
 
 5 100 
 
 .41 
 
 .29 
 
 .30 
 
 .10 
 
 10 100 
 
 .26 
 
 .16 
 
 .14 
 
 .04 
 
 15 100 
 
 .10 
 
 .05 
 
 .07 
 
 
 20 100 
 
 .04 
 
 
 .03 
 
 
 The decrease in the load which a horse can draw upon an incline 
 is not due alone to gravity; it varies with the amount of foothold 
 afforded by the road surface. The tangent of the angle of inclination 
 should not be greater than the coefficient of tractional resistance. 
 Therefore, it is evident that the smoother the road surface, the easier 
 should be the grade; the smoother the surface the less the foothold, 
 and consequently the less the possible load. 
 
 The loss of tractive power on inclines is greater than any inves- 
 tigation will show; for, besides the increase of draft caused by 
 gravity, the power of the horse is much diminished by fatigue upon 
 a long ascent, and even in greater ratio than man, owing to its 
 anatomical formation and great weight. Though a horse on a 
 level is as strong as five men, on a grade of 15 per cent, it is less 
 strong than three; for three men carrying each 100 pounds will 
 ascend such a grade faster and with less fatigue than a horse with 
 300 pounds. 
 
 A horse can exert for a short time twice the average tractive 
 pull which he can exert continuously throughout the day's work; 
 hence, so long as the resistance on the incline is not more than double 
 the resistance on the level, the horse will be able to take up the full 
 load which he is capable of drawing. 
 
 Steep grades are thus seen to be objectionable, and particularly 
 so when a single one occurs on an otherwise comparatively level 
 road, in which case the load carried over the less inclined portions 
 must be reduced to what can be hauled up the steeper portion. 
 
 The bad effects of steep grades are especially felt in winter, 
 
10 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE VI 
 Gross Loads for Horse on Different Pavements on Different Grades 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF SURFACE 
 
 LEVEL 
 
 GRADE 
 (5 per cent) 
 
 GRADE 
 (10 per cent) 
 
 Asphalt 
 
 13,216 
 
 
 
 Broken stone (best condition) 
 
 6,700 
 
 1^840 
 
 1^060 
 
 Broken stone (slightly muddy) 
 
 4,700 
 
 1,500 
 
 1,000 
 
 Broken stone (ruts and mud) 
 
 3,000 
 
 1,390 
 
 890 
 
 Broken stone (very bad condition) 
 
 1,840 
 
 1,040 
 
 740 
 
 Earth (best condition) 
 
 3,600 
 
 1,500 
 
 930 
 
 Earth (average condition) 
 
 1,400 
 
 900 
 
 660 
 
 Earth (moist but not muddy) 
 
 1,100 
 
 780 
 
 600 
 
 Stone-block pavement (dry and clean) 
 
 8,300 
 
 1,920 
 
 1,090 
 
 Stone-block pavement (muddy) 
 
 6,250 
 
 1,800 
 
 1,040 
 
 Sand (wet) 
 
 1,500 
 
 675 
 
 390 
 
 Sand (dry) 
 
 1,087 
 
 445 
 
 217 
 
 when ice covers the roads, for the slippery condition of the surface 
 causes danger in descending, as well as increased labor in ascending; 
 during heavy rains the water also runs down the road and gulleys 
 it out, destroying its surface, thus causing a constant expense for 
 repairs. The inclined portions are subject to greater wear from 
 horses ascending, thus requiring thicker covering than the more 
 level portions, and hence increasing the cost of construction. 
 
 It will rarely be possible, except in a flat or comparatively level 
 country, to combine easy grades with the best and most direct 
 route. These two requirements will often conflict. In such a case, 
 increase the length of the road. The proportion of this increase 
 will depend upon the friction of the covering which is adopted. 
 But no general rule can be given to meet all cases as respects the 
 length which may thus be added, for the comparative time occupied 
 in making the journey forms an important element in any case 
 which arises for settlement. Disregarding time, the horizontal 
 length of a road may be increased to avoid a 5 per cent grade, seventy 
 times the height. 
 
 Table VII shows, for most practical purposes, the force required 
 to draw loaded vehicles over inclined roads. In the fifth column 
 the length given is the length which would require the same motive 
 power to be expended in drawing the load over it, as would be 
 necessary to draw over a mile of the inclined road. The loads 
 given in the sixth column are the maximum loads which average 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 11 
 
 TABLE VII 
 Data for Loaded Vehicles over Inclined Roads 
 
 Rate of Grade 
 (ft. per 100 
 
 ft.) 
 
 Pressure on 
 Plane 
 (Ib. per ton) 
 
 Tendency 
 down Plane 
 (Ib. per ton) 
 
 Power 
 Required to 
 Haul 1 Ton 
 up Plane 
 (Ib.) 
 
 Equivalent 
 Length of 
 Level Road 
 (mi.) 
 
 Maximum 
 Load Horse 
 Can Haul 
 
 (Ib.) 
 
 0.00 
 
 2240 
 
 .00 
 
 45.00 
 
 1.000 
 
 6270 
 
 0.25 
 
 2240 
 
 5.60 
 
 50.60 
 
 1.121 
 
 5376 
 
 0.50 
 
 2240 
 
 11.20. 
 
 56.20 
 
 1.242 
 
 4973 
 
 0.75 
 
 2240 
 
 16.80 
 
 61.80 
 
 1.373 
 
 4490 
 
 1.00 
 
 2240 
 
 22.40 
 
 67.40 
 
 1.500 
 
 4145 
 
 1.25 
 
 *2240 
 
 28.00 
 
 73.00 
 
 1.622 
 
 3830 
 
 1.50 
 
 2240 
 
 33.60 
 
 78.60 
 
 1.746 
 
 3584 
 
 1.75 
 
 2240 
 
 39.20 
 
 84.20 
 
 1.871 
 
 3290 
 
 2.00 
 
 2240 
 
 45.00 
 
 90.00 
 
 2.000 
 
 3114 
 
 2.25 
 
 2240 
 
 50.40 
 
 95.40 
 
 2.120 
 
 2935 
 
 2 . 50. 
 
 2240 
 
 56.00 
 
 101.00 
 
 2.244 
 
 2725 
 
 2.75 
 
 2240 
 
 61.33 
 
 106.33 
 
 2.363 
 
 2620 
 
 3.00 
 
 2239 
 
 67.20 
 
 112.20 
 
 2.484 
 
 2486 
 
 4.00 
 
 2238 
 
 89.20 
 
 134.20 
 
 2.982 
 
 2083 
 
 5.00 
 
 2237 
 
 112.00 
 
 157 . 00 
 
 3.444 
 
 1800 
 
 6.00 
 
 2233 
 
 134.40 
 
 179 . 40 
 
 3.986 
 
 1568 
 
 7.00 
 
 2232 
 
 156.80 
 
 201 . 80 
 
 4.844 
 
 1367 
 
 8.00 
 
 2232 
 
 179.20 
 
 224 . 20 
 
 4.982 
 
 1235 
 
 9.00 
 
 2231 
 
 201.60 
 
 246.60 
 
 4.840 
 
 1125 
 
 10.00 
 
 2229 
 
 224.00 
 
 269.00 
 
 5.977 
 
 1030 
 
 * Near enough for practice; actually 2239.888 
 Pressure on plane == weight Xnat cos of angle of plane 
 
 horses weighing 1,200 pounds can draw over such inclines, the friction 
 of the surface being taken at -V of the load drawn. 
 
 Axle Friction. The resistance of the hub to turning on the 
 axle is the same as that of a journal revolving in its bearing, and has 
 nothing to do with the condition of the road surface. The coefficient 
 of journal friction varies with the material of the journal and its 
 bearing, and with the lubricant. It is nearly independent of the 
 velocity, and seems to vary about inversely as the square root of the 
 pressure. For light carriages when loaded, the coefficient of friction 
 is about 0.020 of the weight on the axle; for the ordinary thimble- 
 skein wagon when loaded, it is about 0.012. These coefficients are 
 for good lubrication; if the lubrication is deficient, the axle friction 
 is 2 to 6 times as much as above. 
 
 The tractive power required to overcome the above axle friction 
 for carriages of the usual proportions is about 3 to 3f pounds per 
 ton of the weight on the axle; and for truck wagons, which have 
 medium sized wheels and axles, it is about 3J to 4J pounds per ton. 
 
12 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE VIII 
 Wind Pressure for Various Vehicles 
 
 DESCRIPTION 
 
 VELOCITY OF WIND 
 (mi. per hour) 
 
 WIND PRESSURE 
 (Ib. per sq. ft.) 
 
 Pleasant breeze 
 
 15 
 
 1.107 
 
 Brisk gale 
 
 
 20 
 25 
 
 1.968 
 3.075 
 
 High wind 
 
 
 30 
 35 
 
 4.428 
 6.027 
 
 Very high wind 
 
 
 40 
 45 
 
 7.782 
 9.963 
 
 Storm 
 
 50 
 
 12.300 
 
 Effect of Springs on Vehicles. Experiments have shown that 
 springs mounted in vehicles materially decrease the resistance to 
 traction and diminish the effects caused in the vertical plane by 
 irregularities of the surface ; but they do not diminish the horizontal 
 component which is the one that causes the greatest wear of the 
 road, especially at speeds beyond a walking pace. The vehicles 
 with springs were found not to cause more wear with the horses 
 going at a trot than vehicles without springs when the horses were 
 walking, all other conditions being similar. Vehicles with springs 
 improperly fixed cause considerable concussion which, in turn, 
 destroys the road covering. 
 
 Resistance of Air. The resistance arising from the force of 
 the wind will vary with the velocity of the wind, with the velocity 
 of the vehicle, with the area of the surface acted upon, and also 
 with the angle of incidence of direction of the wind with the plane 
 of the surface. Table VIII gives the force per square foot for 
 various velocities. 
 
 LOCATION OF ROADS 
 
 The considerations governing the location of roads are 
 dependent upon the commercial condition of the country to be trav- 
 ersed. In old and long-inhabited sections, the controlling element 
 will be the character of the traffic to be accommodated. In such 
 a section, the route is generally predetermined and, therefore, there 
 is less liberty of choice and selection than in a new and sparsely 
 settled district, where the object is to establish the easiest, shortest, 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 13 
 
 and most economical line of intercommunication according to 
 the physical character of the ground. 
 
 Whichever of these two cases may have to be dealt with, the 
 same principle governs the engineer, namely, so to lay out the road 
 as to effect the conveyance of the traffic with the least expenditure 
 of motive power consistent with economy of construction and main- 
 tenance. 
 
 Economy of motive power is promoted by easy grades, by the 
 avoidance of all unnecessary ascents and descents, and by a direct 
 line; but directness must be sacrificed to secure easy grades and to 
 avoid expensive construction. 
 
 RECONNOISSANCE 
 
 Object of Reconnoissance. The selection of the best route 
 demands much care and consideration on the part of the engineer. 
 To obtain the requisite data upon which to form his judgment, 
 he must make a personal reconnoissance of the district. This 
 requires that the proposed route be either ridden or walked over 
 and a careful examination made of the principal physical contours 
 and natural features of the district. The amount of care demanded 
 and the difficulties attending the operations will altogether depend 
 upon the character of the country. The immediate object of the 
 reconnoissance is to select one or more trial lines, from which the 
 final route may be ultimately determined. When there are no 
 maps of the section traversed, or when those which can be procured 
 are indefinite or inaccurate, the work of reconnoitering will be much 
 increased. 
 
 Points to Consider. In making a reconnoissance there are several 
 points which, if carefully attended to, will very considerably lessen 
 the labor and time otherwise required. Lines which would run along 
 the immediate bank of a large stream must of necessity intersect 
 all the tributaries confluent on that bank, thereby demanding a 
 corresponding number of bridges. Those, again, which are situated 
 along the slopes of hills are more liable in rainy weather to suffer 
 from the washing away of the earthwork and the sliding of the 
 embankments; the others which are placed in valleys or on elevated 
 plateaux, when the line crosses the ridges dividing the principal 
 watercourses, will have steep ascents and descents. 
 
14 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 In making an examination of a tract of country, the first point 
 to attract notice is the unevenness or undulation of its surface, 
 which appears to be entirely without system, order, or arrangement; 
 but upon closer examination it will be perceived that one general 
 principle of configuration obtains even in the most irregular countries. 
 The country is intersected in various directions by main watercourses 
 or rivers, which increase in size as they approach the point of their 
 discharge. Towards these main rivers lesser rivers approach on 
 both sides, running right and left through the country, and into 
 these, again, enter still smaller streams and brooks. The streams 
 thus divide the hills into branches or spurs having approximately 
 the same direction as themselves, and the ground falls in every 
 direction from the main chain of hills towards the watercourses, 
 forming ridges more or less elevated. 
 
 The main ridge is cut down at the heads of the streams into 
 depressions called gaps or passes; the more elevated points are 
 called peaks. The water which has fallen upon these peaks is the 
 origin of the streams which have hollowed out the valleys. Further- 
 more, the ground falls in every direction towards the natural water- 
 courses, forming ridges more or less elevated running between them 
 and separating from each other the districts drained by the streams. 
 
 The natural watercourses mark not only the lowest lines, but 
 the lines of the greatest longitudinal slope in the valleys through 
 which they flow. The direction and position of the principal streams 
 give also the direction and approximate position of the high ground 
 or ridges which lie between them. The positions of the tributaries 
 to the larger stream generally indicate the points of greatest depres- 
 sion in the summits of the ridges and, therefore, the points at which 
 lateral communication across the high ground separating con- 
 tiguous valleys can be most readily made. 
 
 Instruments Used. The instruments employed in reconnoiter- 
 ing are: the compass, which is used to ascertain direction; the 
 aneroid barometer, to fix the approximate elevation of summits, 
 etc.; and the hand level, to ascertain the elevation of neighboring 
 points. If a vehicle can be 1 used, an odometer may be added, but 
 distances can usually be guessed or ascertained by time estimates 
 closely enough for preliminary purposes. The best maps obtainable 
 and traveling companions who possess a local knowledge of the 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 15 
 
 country, together with the above outfit, are all that will be necessary 
 for the first inspection. 
 
 PRELIMINARY SURVEY 
 
 The routes selected through the reconnoissance are examined 
 in detail by a survey called a "preliminary survey" from the results 
 of which the exact location can be determined. 
 
 Features to Be Considered. In making the preliminary survey, 
 the topographical features are noted to the right and left of the 
 transit line for a convenient distance. The data required for drawing 
 the topography are obtained by levels taken with a leveling instru- 
 ment or with a transit provided with stadia wires, on lines per- 
 pendicular to the transit line of the survey. The location of build- 
 ings, fences, streams, roads, railroads, and other objects, is determined 
 by measurements made with a tape on lines perpendicular to the 
 survey line; or, when the distance to the object required is con- 
 siderable, the location is found by angles measured from two stations 
 on the transit line and the distance is measured by stadia. The 
 following information is also noted: the importance, magnitude, 
 and direction of the streams crossed; the character of the material 
 to be excavated or available for embankments; the position of 
 quarries; the mode of access thereto, and the kind of stone; the posi- 
 tion of unloading points on railroads; and any other information 
 that might affect a selection. 
 
 Topography. Levels. Levels should be taken along the course 
 of each line, usually at every 100 feet, or at closer intervals, 
 depending upon the nature of the country. In taking the levels, the 
 heights of all existing roads, railroads, rivers, or canals should be 
 noted. "Bench marks" should be established at least every half 
 mile, that is, marks made on any fixed object, such as a gate post, 
 side of a house, or, in the absence of these, a cut made on a large 
 tree. The height and exact description of each bench mark should 
 be recorded in the level book. 
 
 Cross Levels. Wherever considered necessary, levels at right 
 angles to the center line should be taken. These will be found 
 useful in showing what effect a deviation to the right or left of the 
 surveyed line would have. Cross levels should be taken at the 
 intersection of all roads and railroads to show to what extent, if 
 
16 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Fig. 5. Contour Map Used in Road Surveys 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 17 
 
 % 
 
 any, these levels will have to be altered to suit the levels of the 
 proposed road. 
 
 Contours. The levels of the transit and cross lines are worked 
 into a map that shows the irregularities of the ground with reference 
 to its elevations and depressions. Various methods are employed 
 for delineating these upon paper. For the purpose of the engineer 
 the method of contours, Fig. 5, is the most serviceable, since by 
 it the true shape of the hills and valleys can be shown. 
 
 Contours are lines drawn through the points of equal altitude; 
 that is, every point of the ground over which a contour line passes 
 is at a certain height above a known fixed plane called the "datum". 
 
 Fig. 6. Diagram Showing Method of Approximating Elevation of Successive 
 Contours of Inclined Road 
 
 Mean sea level is the datum plane universally employed; when 
 this cannot be conveniently used, an arbitrary plane is adopted 
 which is below the lowest point in the territory under survey. 
 
 The difference of elevation between adjacent contour lines 
 is called the "contour interval"; this may be one, five, ten, or more, 
 feet. Whatever the difference adopted, it must be constant for 
 all contours on the same map. Contours are designated by their 
 height, expressed in feet, above the datum plane. The elevation 
 of each contour is shown in figures at points close enough together 
 to allow the eye to run from one to the other with ease. It is best 
 to break the contour and write the numbers between the ends. If 
 
18 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Method of Showing Contours of Banks 
 . of Streams 
 
 written alongside, the numbers should be placed on the higher 
 
 side of the contour. 
 
 The theory of contours is given in order that no error will be 
 
 made by supposing the 
 slope of the ground from a 
 point in one contour to a 
 point in the next, to be a 
 straight line. The less the 
 contour interval, the less 
 error will be made. If in 
 Fig. 6 the curved line AB 
 represents the actual surface 
 of the ground, and points 
 
 1,3,5, the elevation of suc- 
 cessive contours, the broken 
 line 1,3,5 will represent the 
 assumed ground surface, and its departure from the line AB is the 
 error introduced. If now the points 2, 4, 6 are also determined, 
 or the contour intervals be reduced one-half, the assumed slope 
 
 is 1, 2, S, 4, 5, 6, which 
 differs less from the line 
 AB than the line 1, 3, 5, 
 and hence introduces less 
 error. With points deter- 
 mined at very short inter- 
 vals, the error is practically 
 eliminated. 
 
 A knowledge of the 
 shape of the ground is 
 obtained from the distance 
 of the contours from one 
 another. The steeper the 
 slopes, the closer will the 
 contours be. If in a hill 
 the upper contours, near the 
 summit, are closer together than those near the bottom, the inter- 
 vening ground is concave; if the lower contours are closer than the 
 higher ones, the intervening ground is convex. 
 
 Fig. 8. 
 
 Method of Showing Contour of Small 
 Stream or Dry River Bed 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 19 
 
 Every contour must close upon itself in a loop or else must 
 extend unbroken from one point on the margin of the map to some 
 other point on the margin. An exception is made in the case of 
 large streams, the contour on each bank being carried up-stream 
 until it cuts the water surface, when it is dropped, as shown in Fig. 7. 
 In a small stream or dry bed, the contour crosses at the point where 
 the elevation of the bed is that of the contour, as shown in Fig. 8. 
 
 too 
 
 Fig. 9. Typical Profile as Obtained from Contour Map 
 
 Profile. A profile is a longitudinal section of the route. The 
 profile in any given direction is easily made from the contour map 
 in the manner shown in Fig. 9. Assuming that a profile is required 
 along the line AB, the contours show that the ground rises from 
 A to B y and also that a small isolated elevation occurs at C. The 
 short distance between the contours near B indicates that the 
 rise is steep. To obtain the profile, draw parallel lines at a distance 
 apart equal to the vertical interval between the contours on any 
 convenient exaggerated scale. Number these lines to correspond 
 
20 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 pooy 
 
 OO'SS- 
 
 -OI'S9- 
 
 09'frS- 
 
 OS'tff- 
 
 poojj 
 
 00 '09 
 
 with the numbers on the contours. 
 From each point on the line AB, 
 where it intersects a contour, draw 
 vertical lines to intersect the corre- 
 sponding horizontal line. Connect 
 the several points thus found, remem- 
 bering the distinction between convex 
 and concave surfaces. The profile 
 thus obtained gives the relative heights 
 of different points in the line AB, 
 but it does not give the true gradient. 
 The true gradient cannot be repre- 
 sented accurately unless the vertical 
 intervals are drawn on the same scale 
 as the horizontal scale of the map. 
 If this is done, the elevations will 
 generally be so minute that the 
 profile will not give a sufficiently 
 striking representation of the surface 
 features. It is, therefore, necessary 
 to exaggerate the vertical scale in a 
 certain fixed proportion. A conven- 
 ient scale is 400 feet horizontal and 
 40 feet vertical. A typical prelimi- 
 nary profile, with all the information 
 which it is supposed to give, is shown 
 in Fig. 10. 
 
 Map. The map, Fig. 11, should 
 show the lengths and direction of 
 the different portions of the line, 
 the topography, rivers, water-courses, 
 roads, railroads, and other matters 
 of interest, such as town and county 
 lines, dividing lines between property, 
 timbered and cultivated lands, etc. 
 Any convenient scale may be adopted; 
 400 feet to an inch will be found the 
 most useful. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 21 
 
 00=l Inch. 
 Fig. 11. Typical Map Showing Layout in the Region of the Proposed Road 
 
22 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Memoir. The descriptive memoir should give with minute- 
 ness all information, such as the nature of the soil, character of the 
 several excavations whether earth or rock, and such particular 
 features as cannot be clearly shown upon the map or profile. Special 
 information should be given regarding the rivers crossed, as to their 
 width, depth at highest known flood, velocity of current, character 
 of banks and bottom, and their angle of skew with the line of road. 
 
 Bridge Sites. The question of choosing the site of bridges is 
 an important one. If the selection is not restricted to a particular 
 point, the river should be examined for a considerable distance 
 above and below what would be the most convenient point for 
 crossing; and if a better site is found, the line of the road must be 
 made subordinate to it. If several practicable crossings exist, they 
 must be carefully compared in order to select the one most 
 advantageous. The following are controlling conditions: (1) Good 
 character of river bed, affording a firm foundation. If rock is 
 present near the surface of the river bed, the foundation wdll be 
 easy of execution, and stability and economy will be insured. (2) 
 Stability of river banks, thus securing a permanent concentration 
 of the waters in the same bed. (3) Axis of bridge at right angles 
 to direction of current. (4) Bends in rivers, not being suitable 
 localities, to be avoided if possible. A straight reach above the 
 bridge should be secured if possible. 
 
 FINAL SELECTION OF ROUTE 
 
 Elements Entering into Choice. In making the final selection, 
 the following principles should be observed as far as practicable: 
 
 (1) To follow that route which affords the easiest grades. 
 The easiest grade for a given road will depend on the kind of covering 
 adopted for its surface. 
 
 (2) To connect the places by the shortest and most direct 
 route commensurate with easy grades. 
 
 (3) To avoid all unnecessary ascents and descents. When a 
 road is encumbered with useless ascents, the wasteful expenditure 
 of power is considerable. 
 
 (4) To give the center line such a position, with reference to 
 the natural surface of the ground, that the cost of construction 
 shall be reduced to the smallest possible amount. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 23 
 
 (5) To cross all obstacles, where structures are necessary, as 
 nearly as possible at right angles. The cost of skew structures 
 increases nearly as the square of the secant of the obliquity. 
 
 (6) To cross ridges through the lowest pass which occurs. 
 
 (7) To cross either under or over railroads; for grade crossings 
 mean danger to every user of the highway. 
 
 Treatment of Typical Cases 
 
 Connecting Two Towns in Same or Adjacent Valleys. In 
 
 laying out the line of a road, there are three cases which may have 
 to be treated, and each of these is exemplified in the contour map, 
 Fig. 5. First, the two places to be connected, as the towns A and B 
 on the plan, may both be situated in the same valley, and upon the 
 same side of it; that is, they are not separated from each other by 
 the main stream which drains the valley. This is the simplest 
 case. Second, although both in the same valley, the two places 
 may be on opposite sides of the valley, as at A and C, being sep- 
 arated by the main river. Third, the two places may be situated 
 in different valleys, separated by an intervening ridge of ground 
 more or less elevated, as at A and D. In laying out an extensive 
 line of road, it frequently happens that all these cases have to be 
 dealt with. The most perfect road is that of which the course 
 is perfectly straight and the surface practically level; and, all other 
 things being the same, the best road is that which answers nearest 
 to this description. 
 
 Case 1. Now, in the first case, that of the two towns situated 
 on the same side of the main valley, there are two methods which 
 may be pursued in forming a communication between them. A 
 road following the direct line between them, shown by the thick 
 dotted line AB, may be made, or a line may be adopted which 
 will gradually and equally incline from one town to another, sup- 
 posing them to be at different levels; or, if they are on the same level, 
 the line should keep at that level throughout its entire course, 
 following all the sinuosities and curves which the irregular formation 
 of the country may render necessary for the fulfillment of these 
 conditions. According to the first method, a level or uniformly 
 inclined road might be made from one to the other; this line 
 would cross all the valleys and streams which run down to the 
 
24 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 main river, thus necessitating deep cuttings, heavy embankments, 
 and numerous bridges; or these expensive works might be avoided 
 by following the sinuosities of the valley. When the sides of the 
 main valley are pierced by numerous ravines with projecting spurs 
 and ridges intervening, instead of following the sinuosities, it will 
 be found better to make a nearly straight line cutting through 
 the projecting points in such a way that the material excavated 
 should be just sufficient to fill the hollows. 
 
 Of all these, the best is the straight uniformly inclined or level 
 road, although at the same time it is the most expensive. If the 
 importance of the traffic passing between the places is not sufficient 
 to warrant so great an outlay, it will become a matter of consider- 
 ation whether the course of the road should be kept straight, its 
 surface being made to undulate with the natural face of the country; 
 or whether, a level or equally inclined line being adopted, the course 
 of the road should be made to deviate from the direct line and follow 
 the winding course which such a condition is supposed to necessitate. 
 
 Case 2. In the second case, that of two places situated on 
 opposite sides of the same valley, there is, in like manner, the choice 
 of a perfectly straight line to connect them, winch would probably 
 require a big embankment if the road were kept level; or steep 
 inclines if it followed the surface of the country; or by winding 
 the road, it might be carried across the valley at a higher point, 
 where, if the level road be taken, the embankment would not be 
 so high, or, if kept on the surface, the inclination would be reduced. 
 
 Case 8. In the third case, there is, in like manner, the alter- 
 native of carrying the road across the intervening ridge in a perfectly 
 straight line, or of deviating it to the right and left, and crossing 
 the ridge at a point where the elevation is less. The proper deter- 
 mination of the question which of these courses is the best under 
 certain circumstances involves a consideration of the comparative 
 advantages and disadvantages of inclines and curves. What 
 additional increase in the length of the road would be equivalent 
 to a given inclined plane upon it; or conversely, what inclination 
 might be given to a road as an equivalent to a given decrease in 
 its length? To satisfy this question, the comparative force required 
 to draw different vehicles with given loads must be known, both 
 upon level and variously inclined roads. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 25 
 
 The route which will give the most general satisfaction consists 
 in following the valleys as much as possible and rising afterward 
 by gentle grades. This course traverses the cultivated lands, 
 regions studded with farmhouses and factories. The value of such 
 a line is much more considerable than that of a route by the ridges. 
 The watercourses which flow down to the main valley are, it is 
 true, crossed where they are the largest and require works of large 
 dimensions, but also they are fewer in number. 
 
 Treatment of Intermediate Towns. Suppose that it is desired 
 to construct a road between two distant towns, A and B, Fig. 12, 
 and let us for the present neglect altogether the consideration of 
 the physical features of the intervening country, assuming that it 
 is equally favorable whichever line we select. Now at first sight 
 it would appear that, under such circumstances, a perfectly straight 
 line drawn from one town to 
 
 the other would be the best xj\ 
 
 that could be chosen. On 
 more careful examination, 
 however, of the locality, we 
 may find that there is a 
 third town (7, situated some- fi 
 
 , . Fig. 12. Diagram Showing Method of Deter- 
 
 Wliat On One Side Or the mining Line of Road between Successive 
 
 Towns 
 
 straight line which we have 
 
 drawn from A to B; and although our primary object is to connect 
 only the two latter, it would nevertheless be of considerable service 
 if all three towns were put into mutual connection with each other. 
 This may be effected in three different ways, any one of which 
 might, under the circumstances, be the best. In the first place, 
 we might, as originally suggested, form a straight road from A 
 to B, and in a similar manner two other straight roads from A to C, 
 and from B to C, and this would be the most perfect way of effecting 
 the object in view, the distance between any of the two towns being 
 reduced to the least distance possible. It would, however, be 
 attended with considerable expense, and it would be necessary to 
 construct a much greater length of road than according to the second 
 plan, which would be to form, as before, a straight road from A 
 to B, and from C to construct a road which should join the former 
 at a point D, so as to be perpendicular to it The traffic between 
 
 \ 
 
26 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 A or B and C would proceed to the point D and then turn off to C. 
 With this arrangement, while the length of the roads would be 
 very materially decreased, only a slight increase would be occasioned 
 in the distance between C and the other two towns. The third 
 method would be to form only the two roads AC and CB, in which 
 case the distance between A and B would be somewhat increased, 
 while that between A and C or B and C would be diminished, and 
 the total length of road to be constructed also would be lessened. 
 
 As a general rule it may be taken that the last of these methods 
 is the best and most convenient for the public; that is to say, that 
 if the physical character of the country does not determine the 
 course of the road, it generally will be found best not to adopt a 
 perfectly straight line, but to vary the line so as to pass through all 
 the principal towns near its general course. 
 
 Treatment of Mountain Roads. The location of roads in 
 mountainous countries presents greater difficulties than in an ordi- 
 nary undulating country; the same latitude in adopting undulating 
 grades and choice of position is not permissible, for the maximum 
 must be kept before the eye perpetually. A mountain road has 
 to be constructed on the maximum grade or at grades closely approx- 
 imating it, and but one fixed point can be obtained before com- 
 mencing the survey, and that is the lowest pass in the mountain 
 range ; from this point the survey must be commenced. The reason 
 for this is that the lower slopes of the mountain are flatter than 
 those at their summit; they cover a larger area; and they merge 
 into the valley in diverse undulations. Consequently, a road at the 
 foot of a mountain may be carried at will in the desired direction 
 by more than one route, while at the top of a mountain range any 
 deviation from the lowest pass involves increased length of line. 
 The engineer having less command of the ground, owing to the 
 reduced area he has to deal with and the greater abruptness of the 
 slopes, is liable to be frustrated in his attempt to get his line carried 
 in the desired direction. 
 
 It is a common practice to run a mountain survey up hill, but 
 this should be avoided. Whenever an acute-angled zigzag is met 
 with on a mountain road near the summit, the inference to be drawn 
 is that the line, being carried up hill, on reaching the summit was 
 too low and the zigzag was necessary to reach the desired pass. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 27 
 
 The only remedy in such a case is a resurvey beginning at the summit 
 and running down hill. This method requires a reversal of that 
 usually adopted. The grade line is first staked out and its horizontal 
 location surveyed afterwards. The most appropriate instrument for 
 this work is a transit with a vertical circle on which the telescope 
 may be set to the angle of the maximum grade. 
 
 Loss of Height. "Loss of height" is to be carefully avoided 
 in a mountain road. By loss of height is meant an intermediate 
 rise in a descending grade. If a descending grade is interrupted by 
 the introduction of an unnecessary ascent, the length of the road 
 will be increased, over that due to the continuous grade, by the 
 length of the portion of the road intervening between the summit 
 of the rise and the point in the road on a level with that rise a 
 length which is double that due on the gradient to the height of 
 the rise. For example, if a road descending a mountain rises, at 
 some intermediate point, to cross over a ridge or spur, and the height 
 ascended amounts to 110 feet before the descent is continued, such 
 a road would be just one mile longer than if the descent had been 
 uninterrupted; for 110 feet is the rise due to a half-mile length at 
 a slope of 1 : 24. 
 
 Water on Mountain Roads. - Water is needed by the workmen 
 and during the construction of the road. It is also very necessary 
 for the traffic, especially during hot weather; and if the road exceeds 
 5 miles in length, provision should be made to have the water either 
 close to or within easy reach of the road. With a little ingenuity 
 the water from springs above the road, if such exist, can be led 
 down to drinking fountains for men, and to troughs for animals. 
 
 In a tropical country it would be a matter for serious con- 
 sideration if the best line for a mountain road 10 miles in length 
 or upwards, but without water, should, not be abandoned in favor 
 of a worse line with a water supply available. 
 
 Halting Places. On long lines of mountain roads, halting 
 places should be provided at frequent intervals. 
 
 Alignment of Roads. No rule can be laid down for the align- 
 ment of a road it will depend upon both the character of its traffic 
 and the "lay of the land". To promote economy of transportation, 
 it should be straight; but, if straightness is obtained at the expense 
 of easy grades that might have been obtained by deflections and 
 
28 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 increase in length, it will prove very expensive to the community 
 that uses it. 
 
 The curving road around a hill often may be no longer than 
 the straight one over it, for the latter is straight only with reference 
 to the horizontal plane, while it is curved as to the vertical plane; 
 the former is curved as to the horizontal plane, but straight as to 
 the vertical plane. Both lines curve, and we call the one passing 
 over the hill straight only because its vertical curvature is less 
 apparent to our eyes. Excessive crookedness of alignment is to 
 be avoided, for any unnecessary length causes a constant threefold 
 waste : first, of the interest of the capital expended in making that 
 unnecessary portion; second, of the ever recurring expense of repair- 
 ing it; and third, of the time and labor employed in traveling over it. 
 
 Fig. 13. Diagram Showing Method of Laying Out Curve in Road 
 
 Location and Construction of Curves. Curves, on a road used 
 exclusively by horse-drawn traffic, should have a center radius of 
 not less than 50 feet. On roads used by both horse-drawn and 
 motor- vehicle traffic, the greatest possible radius should be employed 
 and not less than 150 feet at the inner margin. Curves should 
 not be placed at the foot of a steep ascent; and, when they occur 
 on an ascent, the grade at that point should be decreased in order 
 to compensate for the additional resistance of the curve. 
 
 Curves may be either circular or parabolic in form. The 
 latter will be found exceedingly useful for joining tangents of unequal 
 length and for following contours; when the curvature is least 
 at its beginning and ending, the deviations from a straight line 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 29 
 
 are less strongly marked than by a circular arc. The connection 
 between a circular curve and its tangents should be made by a 
 parabolic arc. 
 
 The width of the wheelway on curves should be greater than 
 on tangents; the position in which the additional width will be of 
 the greatest service to the traffic is at the entry arcs, as shown at 
 A and A, Fig. 13, and not at the center B of the curve, which is 
 the point commonly widened. The minimum radius of the outer 
 curve to provide the increased width may be determined by the 
 formula 
 
 in which R is radius of inner curve; W is width of road on tangents; 
 w is width of vehicles; and I is maximum length of vehicles, including 
 teams. If the traffic requires it, a further widening may be obtained 
 by flattening the inner curve as indicated by abc. The radius of 
 the reversing curves should be not less than 15 feet. 
 
 The outer half of the wheelway on curves used by fast motor- 
 vehicle traffic should be raised, as shown in Fig. 14, the amount 
 
 I ~i.'". 14. Diagram Showing Adjustment of Profile on Curves for Rapidly 
 Moving Motor Vehicles 
 
 of elevation being 4 inches for a curve of 150-foot radius and 
 decreasing to 2 inches for a curve of 300-foot radius. 
 
 The approach to curves should afford an unobstructed view 
 for at least 300 feet, and obstructions which prevent the entire 
 length of the curve from being seen by approaching vehicles should 
 be removed. 
 
 Zigzags. The method of surmounting a height by a series of 
 zigzags or by a series of reaches with practicable curves at the 
 turns, is objectionable for the following reasons : 
 
 (1) An acute-angled zigzag obliges the traffic to reverse its 
 direction without affording it convenient room for the purpose. 
 The consequence is that with slow traffic a single train of vehicles 
 is brought to a stand, while if two trains of vehicles, traveling in 
 opposite directions, meet at the zigzag, a block ensues. 
 
30 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 00'99OL 'Off 
 00-99 OI'SJL 
 
 -00 'PJL 21 'LL 
 
 0'L+00'9L00'9 
 
 -02'2I+ -^O0'0l 02'SII^ 
 2 3 & 
 
 (2) With zigzags little 
 progress is made toward the 
 ultimate destination of the 
 road; height is surmounted, 
 but horizontal distance is in- 
 creased without compensation. 
 
 (3) Zigzags are dangerous. 
 Incase of a runaway down hill, 
 the zigzag must prove fatal. 
 
 (4) If the drainage can- 
 not be carried clear of the 
 road at the end of each reach, 
 it must be carried under the 
 road in one reach, only to 
 appear again at the next, when 
 a second bridge, culvert, or 
 drain will be required, and so 
 on at the other reaches. If the 
 drainage can be carried clear 
 at the termination of each 
 reach, the lengths between the 
 curves will be very short, en- 
 tailing numerous zigzag curves, 
 which are expensive to con- 
 struct and maintain. 
 
 Details after Choosing Route 
 
 Final Location. With the 
 route finally determined upon, 
 it must be located. This 
 consists in tracing the line, 
 placing a stake at every 100 
 feet on the straight portions 
 and at every 50 or 25 feet on 
 the curves. At the tangent 
 point of curves, and at points 
 of compound and reverse 
 curves, a larger and more per- 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 31 
 
 manent stake should be placed. Lest those stakes should be dis- 
 turbed in the process of construction, their exact distance from several 
 points outside of the ground to be occupied by the road should be 
 carefully measured and recorded in the notebook, so that they may 
 be replaced. The stakes above referred to show the position of 
 the center line of the road, and form the base line from which all 
 operations of construction are carried on. Levels are taken at each 
 stake, and cross levels are taken at every change of longitudinal slope. 
 
 Construction Profile. The construction or working profile is 
 made from the levels obtained on location. It should be drawn 
 to a horizontal scale of 400 feet to the inch and a vertical scale 
 of 20 feet to the inch. Fig. 15 represents a portion of such a profile. 
 The figures in column A represent the elevation of the ground at 
 every 100 feet, or where a stake has been driven, above datum. 
 The figures in column B are the elevations of the grade above datum. 
 The figures in column C indicate the depth of cut or height of fill; 
 they are obtained by taking the difference between the level of 
 the road and the level of the surface of the ground. The straight 
 line at the top represents the grade of the road; the upper surface 
 of the road when finished would be somewhat higher than this, while 
 the given line represents, what is termed the sub-grade or formation 
 level. All the dimensions refer to the formation level, to which the 
 surface of the ground is to be formed to receive the road covering. 
 
 At all changes in the rate of inclination of the grade line a 
 heavier vertical line should be drawn. 
 
 Gradient. The grade of a line is in its longitudinal slope, and 
 is designated by the proportion between its length and the difference 
 of height of its two extremes. The ratio of these two qualities 
 gives it its name; if the road ascends or falls one foot in every twenty 
 feet of its length, it is said to have a grade of 1 : 20, or a 5 per cent 
 grade. Grades are of two kinds: maximum and minimum. The 
 maximum grade is the steepest which is to be permitted and which 
 on no account is to be exceeded; the minimum grade is the least 
 allowable for good drainage. Table IX gives different methods 
 of designating grades. 
 
 Determination of Gradients. The maximum grade is fixed by 
 two considerations: the one relating to the power expended in 
 ascending, and the other to the acceleration in descending, the 
 
32 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE IX 
 
 Methods of Designating Grades 
 
 AMERICAN METHOD 
 (ft. per 100 ft.) 
 
 ENGLISH METHOD 
 
 FEET PER MILE 
 
 ANGLE WITH HORIZON 
 
 i 
 
 1 400 
 
 13.2 
 
 8' 36" 
 
 - 
 
 1 200 
 
 26.4 
 
 17 11 
 
 
 
 1 150 
 
 39.6 
 
 22 55 
 
 1 
 
 1 100 
 
 52.8 
 
 34 23 
 
 U 
 
 1 80 
 
 66 
 
 42 58 
 
 i| 
 
 1 66| 
 
 79.2 
 
 51 28 
 
 if 
 
 1 57J 
 
 92.4 
 
 1 51 
 
 2 
 
 1 50 
 
 105.6 
 
 186 
 
 2| 
 
 1 44| 
 
 118.8 
 
 1 17 39 
 
 2 
 
 1 40 
 
 132 
 
 1 25 57 
 
 2| 
 
 1 36| 
 
 145.2 
 
 1 34 22 
 
 3 
 
 1 33 
 
 158.4 
 
 1 43 08 
 
 3| 
 
 1 30| 
 
 171.6 
 
 1 51 42 
 
 3| 
 
 1 28^ 
 
 184.8 
 
 2 16 
 
 3f 
 
 1 26f 
 
 198 
 
 2 8 51 
 
 4 
 
 1 25 
 
 211.2 
 
 1 17 26 
 
 4j 
 
 1 23| 
 
 224.4 
 
 2 26 10 
 
 4 
 
 1 22| 
 
 237.6 
 
 2 34 36 
 
 4| 
 
 1 21 
 
 250.8 
 
 2 43 35 
 
 5 
 
 1 20 
 
 284 
 
 2 51 44 
 
 6 
 
 1 13f 
 
 316.8 
 
 3 26 12 
 
 7 
 
 1 14f 
 
 369.6 
 
 4 15 
 
 8 
 
 1 12i 
 
 422.4 
 
 4 34 26 
 
 9 
 
 i Hi 
 
 475.2 
 
 5 8 31 
 
 10 
 
 1 10 
 
 . 528 
 
 5 42 37 
 
 incline. There is a certain inclination, depending upon the degree 
 of perfection given to the surface of the road, which cannot be 
 exceeded without a direct loss of tractive power. This inclination 
 is that, on which, in descending at a uniform speed, the traces 
 slacken, or which causes the vehicles to press on the horses; the 
 limiting inclination within which this effect does not take place is 
 the angle of repose. 
 
 Angle of Repose. The angle of repose for any given road surface 
 can be ascertained easily from the tractive force required upon a 
 level with the same character of surface. Thus if the force necessary 
 on a level to overcome the resistance of the load is ^V of its weight, 
 then the same fraction expresses the angle of repose for that surface. 
 
 On all inclines less steep than the angle of repose, a certain 
 amount of tractive force is necessary in the descent as well as in 
 the ascent, and the mean of the two drawing forces, ascending and 
 descending, is equal to the force along the level of the road. Thus, 
 on such inclines, as much mechanical force is gained in the descent 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 33 
 
 as is lost in the ascent. From this it might be inferred that when a 
 vehicle passes alternately each way along the road, no real loss is 
 occasioned by the inclination of the road; which, however, is not 
 the fact with animal power, for w r hile the up and down slopes in 
 the ascending journey will demand, respectively, a greater and a 
 less number of horses than that required on a level road, no actual 
 compensation for this fluctuation can be made in the descending 
 journey. On inclines which are more steep than the angle of repose, 
 the load presses on the horses during their descent, so as to impede 
 their action, and their power is expended in checking the descent 
 of the load; or if this effect be prevented by the use of any form of 
 drag or brake, then the power expended on such a drag or brake 
 corresponds to an equal quantity of mechanical power expended 
 in the ascent, for which no equivalent is obtained in the descent. 
 
 Grade Problems. Maximum Grade. The maximum grade for 
 a given road will depend: (1) upon the class of traffic that will 
 use it, whether fast and light, slow and heavy, or mixed, consisting 
 of both light and heavy; (2) upon the character of the pavement 
 adopted; and (3) upon the question of cost of construction. Econ- 
 omy of motive power and low cost of construction are antagonistic 
 to each other, and the engineer will have to weigh the two in the 
 balance. 
 
 For fast and light traffic the grades should not exceed 2 per 
 cent; for mixed traffic 3 per cent may be adopted; while for slow 
 traffic combined with economy 5 per cent should not be exceeded. 
 This grade is practicable but not convenient. 
 
 Minimum Grade. From the previous considerations it would 
 appear that an absolutely level road was the one to be sought for, 
 but this is not so; there is a minimum, or a least allowable grade, 
 of which the road must not fall short, as well as a maximum one 
 which it must not exceed. If the road were perfectly level in its 
 longitudinal direction, its surface could not be kept free from water 
 without giving it so great a rise in its middle as would expose vehi- 
 cles to the danger of overturning. The minimum grade commonly 
 used is 1 per cent. 
 
 Undulating Grades. From the fact that the power required 
 to move a load at a given velocity on a level road is decreased on 
 a descending grade to the same extent it is increased in ascending 
 
34 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 the same grade, it must not be inferred that the animal force 
 expended in passing alternately each way over a rising and falling 
 road will gain as much in descending the several inclines as it will 
 lose in ascending them. Such is not the case. The animal force 
 must be sufficient, either in power or number, to draw the load over 
 the level portions and up the steepest inclines of the road, and in 
 practice no reduction in the number of horses can be made to corre- 
 spond with the decreased power required in descending the inclines. 
 
 The popular theory that a gently undulating road is less fatiguing 
 to horses than one which is perfectly level is erroneous. The asser- 
 tion that the alternations of ascent, descent, and levels, call into 
 play different muscles, allowing some to rest while others are exerted, 
 and thus relieving each in turn, is demonstrably false, and con- 
 tradicted by the anatomical structure of the horse. Since this 
 doctrine is a mere popular error, it should be rejected utterly, not 
 only because it is false in itself, but still more because it encourages 
 the building of undulating roads, and this increases the labor and 
 cost of transportation upon them. 
 
 Level Stretches. On long ascents it is generally recommended 
 that level or nearly level stretches be introduced at frequent intervals 
 in order to rest the animals. These are objectionable when they 
 cause loss of height, and animals will be more rested by halting 
 and unharnessing for half an hour than by traveling over a level 
 portion. The only case which justifies the introduction of levels 
 into an ascending road is where such levels will advance the road 
 towards its objective point; where this is the case there will be no 
 loss of either length or height, and it will simply be exchanging a 
 level road below for a level road above. 
 
 Establishing the Grade. When the profile of a proposed route 
 has been made, a grade line is drawn upon it (usually in red) in 
 such a manner as to follow its general slope, but to average its 
 irregular elevations and depressions. If the ratio between the whole 
 distance and the height of the line is less than the maximum grade 
 intended to be used, this line will be satisfactory; but if it be found 
 steeper, the cut or the length of the line will have to be increased. 
 The latter is generally preferable. 
 
 The apex or meeting point of all curves should be rounded off 
 by a vertical curve, as shown in Fig. 16, thus slightly changing 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 35 
 
 the grade at and near the point of intersection. A vertical curve 
 rarely need extend more than 200 feet each way from that point. 
 Let AB and BC be two grades in profile intersecting at station 
 B, and let A and C be the adjacent stations. It is required to join 
 the grades by a vertical curve extending from A to C. Imagine a 
 chord drawn from A to C. The elevation of the middle point of 
 the chord will be a mean of the elevations of the grade at A and (7, 
 and one-half of the difference between this and the elevation of 
 the grade at B will be the middle ordinate of the curve. Hence 
 we have 
 
 TIT 1 /grade A+ grade C , D \ 
 
 M = l^ ^- graded 1 
 
 in which M equals the correction in elevation for the point B. The 
 correction for any other point is proportional to the square of its 
 
 I | J __L j 
 
 Fig. 16. Typical Road Section Showing Rounding Off of Meeting Points of Curves 
 
 distance from A to C. Thus, assuming the distance between 
 successive ordinates, Fig. 16, as 50 feet, the correction ^4+25 is 
 T&M; at ^4+50 it is \M; at A +7 '5 it is &M; and the same for 
 corresponding points on the other side of B. The corrections 
 in this case shown are subtractive, since M is negative. They 
 are additional when M is positive, and the curve concave upward. 
 
 PRELIMINARY ROAD CONSTRUCTION METHODS 
 WIDTH AND TRANSVERSE CONTOUR 
 
 Width of Road. A road should be wide enough to accommodate 
 the traffic for which it is intended, and should comprise a wheelway 
 for vehicles and a space on each side for pedestrians. 
 
 The wheelway of country highways need be no wider than is 
 absolutely necessary to accommodate the traffic using it; in many 
 
36 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 places a track wide enough for a single team is all that is necessary. 
 But the breadth of the land appropriated for highway purposes 
 should be sufficient to provide for all future increase of traffic. 
 The wheelways of roads in rural sections should be double; that is, 
 one portion paved (preferably the center), and the other left with 
 the natural soil. The latter, if kept in repair, will be preferred by 
 teamsters for at least one-half the year. 
 
 The minimum width of the paved portion, if intended to carry 
 two lines of travel, is fixed by the width required to allow two 
 vehicles to pass each other safely. This width is 1 6 feet. If intended 
 for a single line of travel, 8 feet is sufficient, but suitable turnouts 
 must be provided at frequent intervals. The most economical 
 width for any roadway is some multiple of eight. Wide roads 
 are the best; they expose a larger surface to the drying action of 
 the sun and wind, and require less supervision than narrow ones. 
 Their first cost is greater than that of narrow ones, and nearly 
 in the ratio of the increased width. 
 
 The cost of maintaining a mile of road depends more upon 
 the extent of the traffic than upon the extent of its surface, and 
 unless -extremes be taken, the same quantity of material will be 
 necessary for the repair of roads, either wide or narrow, which are 
 subjected to the same amount of traffic. The cost of spreading 
 materials over the wide road will be somewhat greater, but the 
 cost of the materials will be the same. On narrow roads the traffic 
 being confined to one track, will wear more severely than if spread 
 over a wider surface. 
 
 The width of land appropriated for road purposes varies in 
 the United States from 49 J feet to 66 feet; in England and France 
 from 26 to 66 feet. And the width or space macadamized is also 
 subject to variation; in the United States the average width is 
 16 feet; in France it varies between 16 and 22 feet; in Belgium 
 8J feet seems to be the regular width, while in Austria, from 14J 
 to 26i feet. 
 
 Transverse Contour. The centers of roadways in most cases 
 should be higher than the sides, the object being to facilitate the 
 flow of the rain water to the gutters. Where a good surface is 
 maintained a very moderate amount of rise is sufficient for this 
 purpose, but the rise should bear a certain proportion to the width 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 37 
 
 TABLE X 
 
 Proportionate Rise of Center to Width of Carriageway for 
 Different Road Materials 
 
 KIND OF SURFACE 
 
 PROPORTIONS OF RISE AT 
 CENTER TO WIDTH OF 
 CARRIAGEWAY 
 
 Earth 
 Gravel 
 Broken stone 
 
 1:40 
 1:50 
 1:60 
 
 of the carriageway. Earth roads require the most and asphalt 
 the least. The most suitable proportions for the different paving 
 materials is shown in Table X. 
 
 Form of Contour. All authorities agree that the form should 
 be convex, but they differ in the amount and form of the convexity. 
 Circular arcs, two straight lines joined by a circular arc, and ellipses, 
 all have their advocates. For country roads a curve of suitable 
 
 Fig. 17. Typical Section of Road, Showing Contour 
 
 convexity may be obtained as follows: At J of the width from 
 center to side, make the rise } of the total rise, and at J of the width 
 make the rise f of the total, Fig. 17. 
 
 Excessive height and convexity of cross section contract the 
 width of the wheelway by concentrating the traffic at the center, 
 that being the only part where a vehicle can run upright. The force 
 required to haul vehicles over such cross sections is increased because 
 an undue proportion of the load is thrown upon two wheels instead 
 of being distributed equally over the four. The continual tread 
 of horses' feet in one track soon forms a depression which holds 
 water, and the surface is not so dry as with a flat section which 
 allows the traffic to distribute itself over the whole width. Sides 
 formed of straight lines are also objectionable. They wear hollow, 
 retain water, and, by raising the center, defeat the object sought. 
 The required convexity should be obtained by rounding the forma- 
 tion surface, and not by diminishing the thickness of the covering 
 at the sides. 
 
38 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Although on hillside and mountain roads it is generally recom- 
 mended that the surface should consist of a single slope inclining 
 inwards, there is no reason for or advantage gained by this method. 
 The form -best adapted to these roads is the same as for a road under 
 ordinary conditions. 
 
 With a roadway raised in the center and the rain water draining 
 off to gutters on each side, the drainage will be more effectual and 
 speedy than if the drainage of the outer half of the road has to pass 
 over the inner half. The inner half of such a road is usually sub- 
 jected to more traffic than the outer half. If formed of a straight 
 incline, this side will be worn hollow and retain water. The inclined 
 flat section never can be properly repaired to withstand the traffic. 
 Consequently it never can be kept in good order, no matter how 
 constantly it may be mended. It is always below par and when 
 heavy rain falls it is seriously damaged. 
 
 DRAINAGE 
 
 Types of Drainage. In the construction of roads, drainage is of 
 the first importance. The ability of earth to sustain a load depends 
 in a large measure upon the amount of moisture retained by it. 
 Most earths form a good firm foundation so long as they are kept 
 dry, but when wet they lose their sustaining power, becoming soft 
 and incoherent. 
 
 The drainage of roadways is of two kinds, viz, subsurface and 
 surface. . The first provides for the removal of the underground 
 water found in the body of the road; the second provides for the 
 speedy removal of all water falling on the surface of the road. 
 Experience has shown that a thorough removal of the underground 
 water is of the utmost importance and is essential to 'the life of the 
 road. A road covering placed on a wet undrained bottom will be 
 destroyed by both water and frost, and will always be troublesome 
 and expensive to maintain; perfect subsoil drainage is a necessity 
 and will, be found economical in the end even if in securing it 
 considerable expense is required. 
 
 Subsoil Drainage 
 
 The methods employed for securing the subsoil drainage must 
 be varied according to the character of natural soil, each kind of 
 soil requiring different treatment. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 39 
 
 Nature of Soils. The natural soil may be divided into the 
 following classes: siliceous, argillaceous, and calcareous; rock, 
 swamps, and morasses. The siliceous and calcareous soils, the 
 sandy loams and rock, present no great difficulty in securing a 
 dry and solid foundation. Ordinarily they are not retentive of 
 water and therefore require no underdrains; ditches on each side 
 of the road will generally be found sufficient. The argillaceous 
 soils and softer marls require more care; they retain water and are 
 difficult to compact, except at the surface; and they are very unstable 
 under the action of water and frost. 
 
 Location of Drains. The removal of water from the subsoil 
 is effected by drains so placed as to intercept the underground 
 circulation of the water. Regarding the best location for the drains 
 to accomplish this, three cases in general will present themselves: 
 
 Marginal Drains. Where the subsoil is continually wet and 
 without a well-defined flow of water from either side. Under 
 
 Fig. 18. Typical Road Section Showing Marginal Drains 
 
 this condition marginal drains, as shown in Fig. 18, will be found 
 satisfactory. 
 
 Side Drains. Where there is a regular flow from one side to 
 the other, as on a hillside road, a single drain placed on the side 
 
 Fig. 19. Typical Road Section Showing Side Drains 
 
 from which the water comes, as in Fig. 19, will be sufficient usually. 
 
 Center and Cross Drains. Where the subsoil is so retentive 
 
 of water as to require a system of drains under the roadbed, these 
 
40 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 drains may be constructed in a variety of ways. The simplest 
 method is to place a drain under the center of the roadway, as in 
 Fig. 20, connecting it at intervals by cross drains with drains placed 
 at the sides which discharge into the natural watercourses. Where 
 
 Fig. 20. Typical Road Section Showing Center Drain 
 
 the ground is level or has but a slight inclination, the cross drains 
 may be placed at right angles to the axis of the road. Where there 
 is a steep grade it is better to lay the cross drains in the form of 
 an inverted V with the point in the center of the roadway and 
 directed uphill. 
 
 The distance apart of the cross drains depends upon the ease 
 with which the subsoil yields its water. In porous soils the drains 
 will prove efficient at distances of from 30 to 40 feet; in retentive 
 clay the spacing may range from 10 to 20 feet. 
 
 Proper Fall for Drains. The fall to be given the drains 
 depends upon the size of the drain and the amount of water to be 
 carried off. It is not advisable to employ a fall greater than 1 foot 
 in 100 feet. Too great a fall will produce a swift current that is 
 
 Fig. 21. "Blind" Stone Drain 
 
 Fig. 22. "Throat" Stone Drain 
 
 liable to undermine the drain as well as to choke it by foreign 
 
 matter, which a less rapid stream could not have transported. 
 
 Materials Used for Drains. The materials employed for 
 
 drains are: stone, vitrified clay pipe, porous tile, and concrete. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 41 
 
 Stone Drains. The stone drain is constructed in two forms, 
 shown in Figs. 21 and 22. The first form, called a "blind" drain, 
 consists of a trench excavated to the required depth and filled 
 with cobblestones or rounded pebbles. To prevent the soil from 
 washing in and choking it, the larger stones are covered first with 
 a layer of small gravel, and then with a layer of coarse gravel, by 
 which means the water is filtered before passing into the porous 
 mass beneath. Angular stones are not suitable for this type of 
 drain. The second form of stone drain, an open channel called a 
 "throat", is formed in the bottom of the trench with rough slabs 
 of stone, and the trench is filled in the same manner as for a 
 blind drain. 
 
 Vitrified Pipe Drains. Vitrified pipe drains are constructed 
 by placing the pipe in the bottom of the trench, filling the hubs 
 with oakum and back-filling the trench with gravel, broken stone, 
 or a mixture of these. 
 
 Porous Tile Drains. Porous tile, Fig. 23, form very satisfactory 
 drains. They carry off the water with great ease, rarely if ever 
 get choked, and require only a slight 
 inclination to keep the water moving 
 through them. The tile have plain 
 ends which are placed in contact in 
 the trench and wrapped with tar 
 paper or burlap. They are sur- 
 rounded and covered with gravel or 
 
 . . Fig. 23. Porous Tile Drain 
 
 broken stone not exceeding 1 inch in 
 
 size for a depth ranging from 6 to 12 inches, and the remaining 
 
 depth of the trench is filled with large gravel or broken stone. 
 
 Concrete Tile Drains. Tile made of concrete have been in 
 satisfactory service for several decades. They are generally made in 
 lengths of one foot with plain ends and. are laid in the same manner 
 as the porous tile. They can be made in portable machines in the 
 vicinity where they are to be used an advantage that tends 
 toward low first cost. 
 
 For the manufacture of concrete tile the best quality of 
 hydraulic (Portland) cement, clean sand, and fine gravel or broken 
 stone should be used in the proportion of one part cement, two 
 parts sand, and four parts stone; the stone should contain no par- 
 
42 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 tides exceeding f inch in size. Sufficient clean water should be 
 used to produce a "wet mix", which should be poured into the 
 molds before setting begins and rammed lightly. After setting is 
 completed, the tile should be cured for about 90 days. 
 
 Sizes of Drains. The size of the drain to be adopted for a 
 given situation depends upon the amount 
 of water to be carried and the fall that can 
 be given the drain. These two factors being 
 given, there are several formulas that can 
 be used to determine the required size. But, 
 in the subsoil drainage of a road, the amount 
 of water to be moved can be guessed at 
 only; therefore, experience as to what a 
 drain has accomplished in a given locality 
 is a better guide than the result given by 
 any formula. Experience shows that the 
 least practicable size is 4 inches. The 
 amount of water to be moved is generally 
 assumed to vary between J inch and 1 inch per acre, per 24 hours, 
 on the area to be drained. 
 
 Silt Basins. Silt basins should be constructed at all junctions 
 and wherever else they may be considered necessary; they may be 
 made from a single 6-inch pipe, Fig. 24, or constructed of brick 
 masonry. 
 
 Protection of Drain Ends from Weather. As tile drains are 
 more liable to injury from frost than those of either brick or stone, 
 
 Fig. 24. Typical Construction 
 for Silt Basin 
 
 Fig. 25. Proper Method of Covering Drain Outlet 
 
 their ends at the side ditches should not be exposed directly to 
 the weather in very cold climates, but may terminate in blind 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 43 
 
 drains, or a few lengths of vitrified clay pipe reaching under the 
 road a distance of about 3 or 4 feet from the inner slope of the ditch. 
 
 Drain Outlets. Drain outlets may be formed by building a 
 dwarf wall of brick or stone, whichever is the cheapest or most 
 convenient in the locality. The outlet, Fig. 25, should be covered 
 with an iron grating to prevent vermin entering the drain pipes 
 and building nests, thus choking the waterway. 
 
 Side Ditches. Side ditches are provided to carry away the 
 subsoil water from the base of the road, and the rain water which 
 falls upon its surface; to do this speedily they must have capacity 
 and inclination proportionate to the amount of water reaching 
 them. The width of the bed should not be less than 18 inches; 
 the depth will vary with circumstances, but should be such that 
 the water surface shall not reach the subgrade, but remain at least 
 12 inches below the crown of the road. The sides should slope 
 at least 1J to 1. 
 
 The longitudinal inclination of the ditch follows the configura- 
 tion of the general topography, that is, the lines of natural drainage. 
 When the latter has to be aided artificially, grades of from 1 in 
 500 to 1 in 800 will usually answer. 
 
 In absorbent soil less fall is sufficient, and in certain cases 
 level ditches are permissible. The slopes of the ditches must be 
 protected where the grade is considerable. This can be accomplished 
 by sod revetments, riprapping, or paving. 
 
 Surface Drainage 
 
 The drainage of the roadway surface depends upon the preser- 
 vation of the cross section, with regular and uninterrupted fall 
 to the sides and without hollows or ruts in which the water can lie, 
 and also upon the longitudinal fall of the road. If this is not suffi- 
 cient the road becomes flooded during heavy rainstorms and melting 
 snow, and is considerably damaged. 
 
 Side Ditches and Gutters. The removal of surface water 
 from country roads may be effected by the side ditches, into which, 
 when there are no sidewalks, the water flows directly. When there 
 are sidewalks, gutters are formed between the roadway and foot- 
 path, and the water is conducted from these gutters into the side 
 ditches by tile piping laid under the walks at intervals of about 
 
44 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 50 feet. The entrance to these pipes should be protected against 
 washing by a rough stone paving. In the case of covered ditches 
 under the footpath, the water must be led into them by first passing 
 through catch basins. These are small masonry vaults covered 
 with iron gratings to prevent the ingress of stones, leaves, etc. 
 Connection from the catch basin is made by a tile pipe about 6 
 inches in diameter. The mouth of this pipe is placed a few feet 
 above the bottom of the catch basin, and the space below it acts 
 as a depository for the silt carried by the water, and is cleaned 
 out periodically. The catch basins may be placed from 200 to 
 300 feet apart. They should be made of dimensions sufficient 
 to convey the amount of water which is liable to flow into them 
 during heavy and continuous rains. 
 
 If on inclines the velocity of the water is greater than the nature 
 of the soil will withstand, the gutters should be roughly paved. 
 In all cases, the slope adjoining the footpath should be covered 
 with sod. A velocity of 30 feet a minute will not disturb clay 
 with sand and stone; 40 feet per minute will move coarse sand; 
 60 feet a minute will move gravel; 120 feet a minute should move 
 round pebbles 1 inch in diameter, and 180 feet a minute will move 
 angular stones If inches in diameter. 
 
 The scour in the gutters on inclines may be prevented by 
 small weirs of stones or wood stick fascines constructed by the 
 roadmen at a nominal cost. At junctions and crossroads the 
 gutters and side ditches require careful arrangement so that the 
 water from one road may not be thrown upon another; cross drains 
 and culverts will be required at such places. 
 
 Treatment of Springs Found in Cuttings. In cuttings, springs 
 are frequently encountered and become a source of constant danger 
 to the stability of the slopes. In such cases the slope should be 
 excavated at the point where the water appears, until, if possible, 
 the source is reached. When the source has been reached, an outlet 
 is provided by constructing a drain and connecting it with the 
 drain at the roadside. Sometimes it may be impossible to trace 
 the water to a single source, the whole face of the cutting being 
 saturated for some distance. In such cases the treatment may 
 be difficult and expensive, but a series of drains may be run up the 
 slope to such height as will tap all the water appearing. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 45 
 
 In cuttings, the ditch at the toe of the slope is liable to be 
 filled with silt carried down the slope by rain; and where this might 
 occur, covered drains should be constructed. 
 
 Drainage for Hillside Roads. On hillside or mountain roads 
 catch- water ditches should be cut on the mountain side above the 
 road, to cut off and convey the drainage of the ground above them 
 to the neighboring ravines. The size of these ditches will be 
 determined by the amount of rainfall, extent of drainage from the 
 mountain which they intercept, and by the distances of the ravine 
 watercourses on each side. 
 
 Inner and Outer Road Gutters. The inner road gutter should 
 be of dimensions ample to carry off the water reaching it; when 
 in soil, it should be roughly paved with stone. When paving is 
 not absolutely necessary, but is desirable to arrest the scouring 
 action of running water during heavy rains, stone weirs may be 
 erected across the gutter at convenient intervals. The outer gutter 
 need not be more than 12 inches wide and 9 inches deep. The 
 gutter is formed by a depression in the surface of the road close 
 to the parapet or revetted earthen protection mound. The drainage 
 which falls into this gutter is led off through the parapet, or other 
 roadside protection, at frequent intervals. The guard stones on 
 the outside of the road are placed in and across the gutter, just 
 below the drainage holes, so as to turn the current of the drainage 
 into these holes or channels. On straight reaches, with parapet 
 protection, drainage holes with guard stones should be placed every 
 20 feet apart. Where earthen mounds are used, and it may not be 
 convenient to have the drainage holes or channels every 20 feet, 
 the guardstones are to be placed in advance of the gutter to allow 
 the drainage to pass behind them. This drainage is either to be 
 run off at the cross drainage of the road, or to be turned off as before 
 by a guard stone set across the gutter. 
 
 At re-entering turns, where the outer side of the road requires 
 particular protection, guard stones should be placed every 4 feet. 
 As all re-entering turns should be protected by parapets, the drainage 
 holes through them may be placed as close together as desired. 
 
 Where the road is in embankment the surface water must be 
 prevented from running down the slopes by providing ample gutters 
 suitably connected to the natural watercourses. 
 
46 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Water Breaks. Water breaks to turn the surface drainage 
 into the side ditches, should not be constructed on improved roads. 
 They increase the grade and are an impediment to convenient 
 and easy travel. W T here it is necessary that water should cross 
 the road, a culvert should be built. 
 
 CULVERTS 
 
 Functions of Culverts. Culverts are necessary for carrying 
 the cross streams under a road, and also for conveying the surface 
 water collected in the side ditches from the upper side to that side 
 on which the natural watercourses lie. 
 
 Especial care is required to provide an ample way for the water 
 to be passed. If the culvert is too small, it is liable to cause a 
 washout, entailing interruption of traffic and cost of repairs, and 
 possibly may cause accidents that will require payment of large 
 sums for damages. On the other hand, if the culvert is made 
 unnecessarily large, the cost of construction is needlessly increased. 
 
 Factors Considered in Design of Culverts. The area of water- 
 way required depends upon a number of important factors, which 
 will be discussed briefly. 
 
 Rate of Rainfall. It is the maximum rate of rainfall during 
 the severest storms which is required in this connection. This 
 varies greatly in different sections of the country. 
 
 The maximum rainfall as shown by statistics is about one inch 
 per hour (except during heavy storms); equal to 3,630 cubic feet 
 per acre. Owing to various causes, not more than 50 to 75 per 
 cent of this amount will reach the culvert within the same hour. 
 
 Inches of rainfall X 3,630 = cubic feet per acre 
 
 Inches of rainf all X 2,323,200 = cubic feet per square mile 
 
 Kind and Condition of Soil. The amount of water to be drained 
 off will depend upon the permeability of the surface of the ground, 
 which will vary greatly with the kind of soil, the degree of saturation, 
 the condition of the cultivation, the amount of vegetation, etc. 
 
 Character and Inclination of Surface. The rapidity with which the 
 water will reach the watercourse depends upon whether the surface is 
 rough or smooth, steep or flat, barren or covered with vegetation, etc. 
 
 Condition and Inclination of Stream Bed. The rapidity with 
 which the water will reach the culvert depends upon whether there 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 47 
 
 is a well-defined and unobstructed channel or whether the water finds 
 its way in a broad, thin sheet. If the watercourse is unobstructed and 
 has a considerable inclination, the water may arrive at the culvert 
 nearly as rapidly as it falls; but if the channel is obstructed, the 
 water may be much longer in passing the culvert than in falling. 
 
 Shape of Area to be Drained and Position of Stream Branches. 
 The area of waterway depends upon the amount of the area to 
 be drained ; but in many cases the shape of this area and the position 
 of the branches of the stream are of more importance than the 
 amount of the territory. For example, if the area is long and 
 narrow, the water from the lower portion may pass through the 
 culvert before that from the upper end arrives; or, on the other 
 hand, if the upper end of the area is steeper than the lower, the water 
 from the former may arrive simultaneously with that from the 
 latter. Again, if the lower part of the area is supplied better with 
 branches than the upper portion, the water from the former will 
 be carried past the culvert before the arrival of that from the latter; 
 or, on the other hand, if the upper part is supplied better with branch 
 watercourses than is the low r er, the water from the whole area 
 may arrive at the culvert at nearly the same time. In large areas 
 the shape of the area and the position of the watercourses are very 
 important considerations. 
 
 Mouth of Culvert and Inclination of Bed. The efficiency of a 
 culvert may be increased very materially by arranging the upper 
 end so that the water may enter into it without being retarded. 
 The discharging capacity of a culvert can be increased greatly by 
 increasing the inclination of its bed, provided the channel below will 
 allow the water to flow away freely after having passed the culvert. 
 
 Provision for Discharge of Water Under Head. The discharging 
 capacity of a culvert can be increased greatly by allowing the water 
 to dam up above it. A culvert will discharge twice as much under 
 a head of four feet as under a head of one foot. This can be done 
 safely only with a well-constructed culvert. 
 
 The determination of the values of the different factors entering 
 into the problem is almost wholly a matter of judgment. An 
 estimate for any one of the above factors is liable to be in error 
 from 100 to 200 per cent, or even more, and of course any result 
 deduced from such data must be very uncertain. Fortunately, 
 
48 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 mathematical exactness is not required by the problem nor warranted 
 by the data. The question is not one of 10 or 20 per cent of increase; 
 for if a 2-foot pipe is insufficient, a 3-foot pipe probably will be 
 the next size, an increase of 225 per cent; and if a 6-foot arch culvert 
 is too small, an 8-foot will be used, an increase of 180 per cent. 
 The real question is whether a 2-foot pipe or an 8-foot arch culvert 
 is needed. 
 
 Valuable data on the proper size of any particular culvert may 
 be obtained as follows: (1) by observing the existing openings on 
 the same stream; (2) by measuring, preferably at time of high 
 water, a cross section of the stream at some narrow place; and (3) 
 by determining the height of high water as indicated by drift and 
 debris, and from the evidence of the inhabitants of the neighborhood. 
 
 On mountain roads, or roads subjected to heavy rainfall, 
 culverts of ample dimensions should be provided wherever required, 
 and it will be more economical to construct them of masonry. In 
 localities where boulders and debris are likely to be washed down 
 during wet weather, it will be a good precaution to construct catch 
 pools at the entrance of all culverts and cross drains for the reception 
 of such matter. In hard soil or rock these catch pools will be 
 simple well-like excavations, with their bottoms two or three feet 
 below the entrance sill or floor of the culvert or drain. Where 
 the soil is soft they should be lined with stone laid dry; if very soft, 
 with masonry. The size of the catch pools will depend upon the 
 width of the drainage works. They should be wide enough to 
 prevent the drains from being injured by falling rocks and stones 
 of a not inordinate size. 
 
 The use of catch pools obviates the necessity of building culverts 
 and drains at an angle to the axis of the road. Oblique structures 
 are objectionable, as being longer than if set at right angles and by 
 reason of the acute- and obtuse-angled terminations to their piers, 
 abutments, and coverings. 
 
 Types of Culverts 
 
 General Classification. Three types of culverts are employed, 
 namely: pipe, box, and arch. The pipe culvert is employed for 
 small streams, in sizes from 12 to 24 inches. Box culverts are 
 employed in sizes from 24 inches up to 8 feet. Arch culverts are 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 49 
 
 used for spans 8 feet and over. In the construction of culverts 
 a variety of materials are used. Pipe culverts are constructed 
 of earthenware or vitrified clay, cast iron, corrugated steel, brick, 
 or concrete; box and arch culverts are built of stone, brick, or con- 
 crete. Short span concrete bridges are also often employed as 
 culverts. The type of culvert and the material to be used are 
 determined in some cases by the cost; in others by the load to be 
 supported, as where the depth of fill over the culvert is considerable, 
 or where a large area of waterway is required. 
 
 Earthenware Pipe Culverts. Construction. In laying the pipe 
 the bottom of the trench should be rounded out to fit the lower 
 half of the body of the pipe, with proper depressions for the sockets. 
 If the ground is soft or sandy, the earth should be rammed carefully, 
 but solidly, in and around the lower part of the pipe. The top 
 surface of the pipe, as a rule, never should be less than 18 inches 
 below the surface of the roadway, but there are many cases where 
 pipes have stood, for several years, under heavy loads, with only 
 8 to 12 inches of earth over them. No danger from frost need be 
 apprehended, provided the culverts are so constructed that the 
 water is carried away from the level end. Ordinary soft drain 
 tiles are not affected in the least by the expansion of frost in the 
 earth around them. 
 
 The freezing of water in the pipe, particularly if more than half 
 full, is liable to burst it; consequently the pipe should have a suffi- 
 cient fall to drain itself, and the outside should be so low that there 
 is no danger of backwaters reaching the pipe. If properly drained, 
 there is no danger from frost. 
 
 Jointing. In many cases, perhaps in most, the joints are 
 not calked. If this is not done, there is danger of the water being 
 forced out of the joints and of washing away the soil from around 
 the pipe. Even if the danger is not very imminent, the joints 
 of the larger pipes, at least, should be calked with hydraulic cement, 
 since the cost is very small compared with the insurance against 
 damage thereby secured. Sometimes the joints are calked with 
 clay. Every culvert should be built so it can discharge water 
 under a head without damage to itself. 
 
 Use of Bulkheads. Although often omitted, the end sections 
 should be protected with a masonry, Fig. 26, or timber bulkhead. 
 
50 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 The foundation of the bulkhead should be deep enough not to be 
 disturbed by frost. In constructing the end wall, it is well to 
 increase the fall near the outlet to allow for a possible settlement 
 
 Fig. 26. Typical Design for Masonry Bulkhead 
 
 of the interior sections. When stone and brick abutments are too 
 expensive, a fair substitute can be made by setting posts in the 
 ground and spiking plank to them. When planks are used, it 
 is best to set them with considerable inclination towards the road- 
 bed to prevent their being crowded outward by the pressure of the 
 embankment. The upper end of the culvert should be so protected 
 
 1 
 I 
 
 Fig. 27. Section Showing Typical Layout for Double Pipe Culvert 
 
 that the water will not readily find its way along the outside of the 
 
 pipes, in case the mouth of the culvert should become submerged. 
 
 When the capacity of one pipe is not sufficient, two or more 
 
 may be laid side by side as shown in Fig. 27. Although the two 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 51 
 
 small pipes do not have as much discharging capacity as a single 
 large one of equal cross section, yet there is an advantage in laying 
 two small ones side by side, since the water need not rise so high 
 to utilize the full capacity of the two pipes as would be necessary 
 to discharge itself through a single one of large size. 
 
 Iron Pipe Culverts. During recent years iron pipe, Fig. 28, 
 has been used for culverts on many prominent railroads, and may 
 be used on roads in sections where other materials are unavailable. 
 
 In constructing a culvert with cast-iron pipe the points requiring 
 particular attention are: (1) tamping the soil tightly around the 
 pipe to prevent the water from forming a channel along the outside; 
 
 Fig. 28. Section Showing Construction of Iron Pipe Culvert 
 
 and (2) protecting the ends by suitable head walls and, when neces- 
 sary, laying riprap at the lower end. The amount of masonry 
 required for the end walls depends upon the relative width of the 
 embankment and the number of sections of pipe used. For example, 
 if the embankment is, say, 40 feet wide at the base, the culvert 
 may consist of three 12-foot lengths of pipe and a light end wall 
 near the toe of the bank; but if the embankment is, say, 32 feet 
 wide, the culvert may consist of two 12-foot lengths of pipe and a 
 comparatively heavy end wall well back from the toe of the bank. 
 The smaller sizes of pipe usually come in 12-foot lengths, but some- 
 times a few 6-foot lengths are included for use in adjusting the 
 length of the culvert to the width of the bank. The larger sizes 
 are generally 6 feet long. 
 
52 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Box Culverts. Box culverts, Fig. 29, consist of two side walls 
 with a flat deck. When stone is used, they are generally built of 
 dry rubble masonry. The walls should be well founded at about 
 42 inches below the bed of the stream. The thickness of the walls 
 varies according to the height. The wings are formed by extending 
 the walls out straight and stepping them down. The deck may be 
 made of stone slabs or reinforced concrete; with the latter it is 
 possible to use wider spans than with stone slabs. Where the force 
 of the stream is sufficient to scour the bed, it will be necessary to 
 
 End View and Section 
 
 Lonqiludinal Section 
 Fig. 29. Typical Design of Concrete Box Culvert 
 
 pave it with stone or concrete. When reinforced concrete is used 
 instead of stone, the side walls are made from 4 to 8 inches thick, 
 depending upon the height. Where it is not necessary to pave 
 the stream bed, the walls are carried down about 2 feet below the 
 bed, and founded upon a footing 9 to 12 inches thick and sufficiently 
 wide to secure ample area of the soil to support the load. Where 
 scouring of the bed is liable to occur, a concrete bottom is con- 
 structed throughout the entire width and length of the culvert, 
 and the side walls are founded on it; if necessary, a cut-off wall 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 53 
 
 is constructed across each end to a depth of about 2 feet below 
 the bottom. 
 
 Arch Culverts. The arch form of culvert is more costly than 
 the other forms, but it is often preferred on account of its appearance, 
 Fig. 30. When masonry and plain concrete are used, very heavy 
 abutments are required in order that no movement can take place 
 under a live load, to cause bending moments in the arch. In design- 
 ing reinforced-concrete arches, bending is provided for by consider- 
 
 Section and End Vie 
 
 Side Elevation. 
 
 Fig. 30. Design for Arch Culvert 
 
 ing the arch as a curved beam, with a consequent reduction in the 
 weight of the abutments. 
 
 Short Span Bridges Used as Culverts. Three types of rein- 
 forced-concrete bridges are employed for short spans: (a) the flat 
 slab; (6) the T-beam; (c) the steel I-beam incased in concrete, 
 Fig. 31. The length of span over which reinforced slabs may be 
 built with safety depends upon the load to be carried; under normal 
 conditions the maximum span is 12 feet. The thickness of the slab 
 for a span 2 feet should be not less than 6 inches and should increase 
 with increase of span. The slabs are reinforced with steel bars, 
 expanded metal, or other forms of reinforcing metal; the cross- 
 
54 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 sectional area of the reinforcing steel required is about 1 per cent 
 of that of the slab.* 
 
 The T-beam type is practicable for spans from 12 to 30 feet. 
 The I-beam type may be used for all spans up to 30 feet. In this 
 type, the I-beam is designed to transmit the load to the abutments, 
 while the reinforced-concrete floor transmits the load to the I-beams. 
 This type of construction is noted for its safety and ability to with- 
 stand severe and unfavorable conditions, such as the settlement 
 of the abutments, which may cause rupture of the concrete. The 
 
 wr 
 
 5eclion of Flal Slab CL 
 
 Reinforcement^ 
 
 Section Through Top For T Beam Culvert 
 (Reinforcement ,^. rr ^. Trr ..^ 7T .. r ^ : ^ r -,..^,. r _ Steel I- 
 
 Section Through Top For I Beam 
 Fig. 31. Sections of Typical Short Span Concrete Bridges Used as Culverts 
 
 I-beam may or may not be incased in the concrete; the object sought 
 in so doing is to protect it from rust. This may be accomplished 
 also by painting, but as this needs to be repeated frequently and 
 as there is a possibility that it will not be done, it is better to incase 
 the beams in the concrete during construction, and so insure their 
 permanent protection. This type also admits of arch construction 
 between the beams for the floor system, thus decreasing the depth 
 required for the floor; this feature may be of value in locations where 
 the area of the waterway or the "head room" is a controlling factor. 
 
 "The theory of design of concrete bridges and culverts is discussed in Masonry and Rein- 
 forced Concrete, Part III. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 55 
 
 EARTHWORK 
 
 The term "earthwork" is applied to all the operations per- 
 formed in the making of excavations and embankments. In its 
 widest sense it comprehends work in rock as well as in the looser 
 materials of the earth's crust. 
 
 Balancing Cuts and Fills. In the construction of new roads, 
 the formation of the roadbed consists in bringing the surface of the 
 ground to the adopted grade. This grade should be established so as 
 to reduce the earthwork to the least possible amount, both to render 
 the cost of construction low, and to avoid unnecessarily marring 
 the appearance of the country in the vicinity of the road. The 
 most desirable position of the grade line is usually that which makes 
 the amounts of cutting and filling equal to each other, for any sur- 
 plus embankment over cutting must be made up by borrowing, 
 % and surplus cutting must be wasted; both of these operations 
 involving additional cost for labor and land. 
 
 Side Slopes. Inclination. The proper inclination for the 
 side slopes of cutting and embankments depends upon the nature 
 of the soil, the action of the atmosphere, and the action of internal 
 moisture upon it. For economy the inclination should be as steep 
 as the nature of the soil will permit. 
 
 The usual slopes in cuttings are: 
 
 Solid rock to 1 
 
 Earth and gravel 1 to 1 
 
 Clay 3 or 6 to 1 
 
 Fine sand 2 or 3 to 1 
 
 The slopes of embankment are usually made 1J to 1. 
 
 Form of Slopes. The natural, strongest, and ultimate form 
 of earth slopes is a concave curve, in which the flattest portion 
 is at the bottom. This form is very rarely given to the slopes in 
 constructing them; in fact, the reverse is often the case, the slopes 
 being made convex, thus saving excavation by the contractor 
 and inviting slips. 
 
 In cuttings exceeding 10 feet in depth the forming of concave 
 slopes will aid materially in preventing slips, and in any case they 
 will reduce the amount of material which eventually will have to 
 be removed when cleaning up. Straight or convex slopes will 
 continue to slip until the natural form is attained. 
 
56 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 A revetment or retaining wall at the base of a slope will save 
 excavation. 
 
 In excavations of considerable depth, and particularly in soils 
 liable to slips, the slope may be formed in terraces, the horizontal 
 offsets or benches being made a few feet in width with a ditch on 
 
 Fig. 32. Section Showing Correct Slopes of Embankments 
 
 the inner side to receive the surface water from the portion of the 
 side slope above them. These benches catch and retain earth 
 
 Fig. 33. Section Showing Correct Slopes of Excavations 
 
 that may fall from the slopes above them. The correct forms for 
 the slopes of embankment and excavation are shown in Figs. 32 
 and 33. 
 
 Covering of Slopes. It is not usual to employ any artificial 
 means to protect the surface of the side slopes from the action of 
 the weather; but it is a precaution which in the end will save much 
 labor and expense in keeping the roadways in good order. The 
 simplest means which can be used for this purpose consist in cover- 
 ing the slopes with good sods, or else with a layer of vegetable 
 mold about four inches thick, carefully laid and sown with grass 
 seed. These means are amply sufficient to protect the side slopes 
 from injury when they are not exposed to any other cause of 
 deterioration than the wash of the rain and the action of frost 
 on the ordinary moisture retained by the soil. 
 
 A covering of brushwood or a thatch of straw may also be used 
 with good effect; but from their perishable nature they will require 
 frequent renewal and repairs. 
 
 Where stone is abundant a small wall of stone laid dry may be 
 constructed at the foot of the slopes to prevent any wash from them 
 being carried into the ditches. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 57 
 
 Shrinkage of Earthwork. All materials when excavated in- 
 crease in bulk, but after being deposited in banks subside or shrink 
 (rock excepted) until they occupy less space than in the pit from 
 which excavated. 
 
 Rock, on the other hand, increases in volume by being broken 
 up, and does not settle again into less than its original bulk. The 
 increase may be taken at 50 per cent. 
 
 The shrinkage in the different materials is about as follows: 
 
 Gravel 8 per cent 
 
 Gravel and sand 9 per cent 
 
 Clay and clay earths 10 per cent 
 
 Loam and light sandy earths 12 per cent 
 
 Loose vegetable soil 15 per cent 
 
 Puddled clay 25 per cent 
 
 Thus an excavation of loam measuring 1000 cubic yards will 
 form only about 880 cubic yards of embankment, or an embankment 
 of 1000 cubic yards will require about 1120 cubic yards, measured 
 in excavation, to make it. A rock excavation measuring 1000 yards 
 will make from 1500 to 1700 cubic yards of embankment, depending 
 upon the size of the fragments. 
 
 The lineal settlement of earth embankments will be about in 
 the ratio given above; therefore either the contractor should be 
 instructed, in setting his poles to guide him as to the height of grade 
 on an earth embankment, to add the required percentage to the 
 fill marked on the stakes, or the percentage may be included in 
 the fill marked on the stakes. In rock embankments this is not 
 necessary. 
 
 Classification of Earthwork. Excavation is usually classified 
 as earth, hardpan, loose rock, or solid rock. For each of these 
 classes a specific price is usually agreed upon, and an extra allowance 
 is sometimes made when the haul, or distance to which the excavated 
 material is moved, exceeds a given amount. 
 
 The characteristics which determine the classes to which a 
 given material belongs are usually described with clearness in the 
 specifications, as : 
 
 Earth, to include loam, clay, sand, and loose gravel. 
 
 Hardpan, to include cemented gravel, slate, cobbles, and 
 boulders containing less than 1 cubic foot, and all other material 
 of an earthy nature, however compact it may be. 
 
58 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Loose rock t to include shale, decomposed rock, boulders, and 
 detached masses of rock containing not less than 3 cubic feet, and 
 all other material of a rock nature which may be loosened with a 
 pick, although blasting may be resorted to in order to expedite the 
 work. 
 
 Solid rock, to include all rock found in place in ledges and 
 masses, or boulders measuring more than 3 cubic feet, and which 
 can only be removed by blasting. 
 
 Prosecution of Earthwork. No general rule can be laid down 
 for the exact method of carrying on an excavation and disposing 
 of the excavated material. The operation in each case can be 
 determined only by the requirements of the contract, character 
 of the material, magnitude of the work, length of haul, etc. 
 
 Methods of Forming Embankments. General Case. Where 
 embankments are to be formed less than 2 feet in height, all stumps, 
 weeds, etc., should be removed from the space to be occupied by 
 the embankment. For embankments exceeding 2 feet in height 
 stumps need only be close cut. Weeds and brush, however, ought 
 to be removed and if the surface is covered with grass sod, it is 
 advisable to plow a furrow at the toe of the slope. Where a cut 
 passes into a fill all the vegetable matter should be removed from 
 the surface before placing the fill. The site of the bank should 
 be examined carefully and all deposits of soft, compressible matter 
 removed. When a bank is to be made over a swamp or marsh, 
 the site should be drained thoroughly, and if possible the fill should 
 be started on hard bottom. 
 
 Perfect stability is the object aimed at, and all precautions 
 necessary to this end should be taken. Embankments should be 
 built in successive layers: banks 2 feet and under in layers from 6 
 inches to 1 foot; heavier banks in layers 2 and 3 feet thick. The 
 horses and vehicles conveying the materials should be required to 
 pass over the bank for the purpose of consolidating it, and care 
 should be taken to have the layers dip towards the center. Embank- 
 ments which have been first built up in the center, and after- 
 wards widened by dumping the earth over the sides, should never 
 be allowed. 
 
 Embankments on Hillsides. When the axis of the road is 
 laid out on the side slope of a hill, and the road is formed partly 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 59 
 
 by excavating and partly by embanking, the usual and most simple 
 method is to extend out the embankment gradually along the whole 
 line of the excavation. This method is insecure; the excavated 
 material if simply deposited on the natural slope is liable to slip, 
 and no pains should be spared to give it a secure hold, particularly 
 at the toe of the slope. The natural surface of the slope should be 
 cut into steps, as shown in Fig. 34. The dotted line AB represents 
 the natural surface of the ground, CEB the excavation, and ADC 
 the embankment, resting on steps which have been cut between A 
 and C. The best position for these steps is perpendicular to the 
 axis of greatest pressure. If AD is inclined at the angle of repose 
 of the material, the steps near A should be inclined in the oppo- 
 site direction to AD, and at an angle of nearly 90 degrees thereto, 
 
 Fig. 34. Section of Embankment Showing Reinforcing by Means of Steps 
 
 while the steps near C may be level. If stone is abundant in the 
 locality, the toe of the slope may be further secured by a dry wall 
 of stone. 
 
 On hillsides of great inclination the above method of construc- 
 tion will not be sufficiently secure; retaining walls of stone must 
 be substituted for the side slopes of both the excavations and embank- 
 ments. These walls may be made of stone laid dry, when stone 
 can be procured in blocks of sufficient size to render this kind of 
 construction of sufficient stability to resist the pressure of the 
 earth. When the stones laid dry do not offer this security, they 
 must be laid in mortar. The wall which forms the slope of the 
 excavation should be carried up as high as the natural surface 
 of the ground. Unless the material is such that the slope may be 
 safely formed into steps or benches, as shown in Fig. 34, the wall 
 that sustains the embankment should be built up to the surface 
 
60 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 of the roadway, and a parapet wall or fence raised upon it, to protect 
 pedestrians against accident, Fig. 35. 
 
 For the formula for calculating the dimensions of retaining 
 walls see Instruction Paper on Masonry and Reinforced Concrete, 
 Part III. 
 
 Treatment of Roadways on Rock Slopes. On rock slopes, when 
 the inclination of the natural surface is not greater than 1 on the 
 vertical to 2 on the base, the road may be constructed partly in 
 excavation and partly in embankment in the usual manner, or 
 by cutting the face of the slope into horizontal steps with vertical 
 faces, and building up the embankment in the form of a solid stone 
 wall in horizontal courses, laid either dry or in mortar. Care is 
 required in proportioning the steps, as all attempts to lessen the 
 
 Fig. 35. Reinforcing Roadway by Parapet Wall or Fence 
 
 quantity of excavation, by increasing the number and diminishing 
 the width of the steps, require additional precautions against settle- 
 ment in the built-up portion of the roadway. 
 
 When the rock slope has a greater inclination than 1:2 the 
 whole of the roadway should be in excavation. 
 
 In some localities roads have been constructed along the face 
 of nearly perpendicular cliffs, on timber frameworks consisting of 
 horizontal beams firmly fixed at one end by being let into holes 
 drilled in the rock, the other end being supported by an inclined 
 strut resting against the rock in a shoulder cut to receive it. There 
 are also examples of similar platforms suspended instead of being 
 
 supported. 
 
 Tools for Construction Work 
 
 Picks. Picks are made in various styles, according to the class 
 of material in which they are to be used. Fig. 36 shows the form 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 61' 
 
 usually employed in street work. Fig. 37 shows the form generally 
 used for clay or gravel excavation. 
 
 Fig. 36. Grading Pick 
 Courtesy of Acme Road Machinery Company, Frankfort, New York 
 
 The eye of the pick is formed generally of wrought iron, while 
 the points are of steel. The weight of picks ranges from 4 to 9 
 pounds. 
 
 Fig. 37. Clay Pick 
 Courtesy of Acme Road Machinery Company, Frankfort, New York 
 
 Grubbing Tools. In handling brush, stumps, etc., such tools 
 as the bush hooks, Fig. 38, the bush mattock, Fig. 39, and the axe 
 mattock, Fig. 40, are com- 
 monly used. These are 
 cutting as well as grading 
 tools. 
 
 Shovels. Shovels, Fig. 
 41, are made in tw T o forms, 
 square and round pointed, 
 usually of pressed steel. 
 
 Plows. Plows are em- 
 
 , , ... Fig. 38. Bush Hooks 
 
 ployed extensively in grad- 
 
 Fig. 39. Bush Mattock 
 
 Fig. 40. Axe Mattock 
 
 ing, special forms being manufactured for the purpose. They are 
 known as "grading plows", "road plows", "township plows", etc. 
 
62 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 They vary in form according to the kind of work they are intended 
 for, viz, loosening earth, gravel, hardpan, and some of the softer rocks. 
 
 These plows are of great strength ; 
 selected white oak, rock elm, wrought 
 steel, and iron generally being used in 
 their construction. The cost of oper- 
 ating plows ranges from 2 to 5 cents 
 per cubic yard, depending upon the 
 compactness of the soil. The quan- 
 tity of material loosened will vary 
 from 2 to 5 cubic yards per hour. 
 
 Grading Plow. Fig. 42 shows the 
 form usually adopted for loosening 
 earth. This plow does not turn the 
 soil, but cuts a furrow about 10 inches 
 wide and of a depth adjustable up to 
 11 inches. 
 
 In light soil the plows are oper- 
 ated by 2 or 4 horses; in heavy soil 
 as many as 8 are employed. Grad- 
 ing plows vary in weight from 100 
 to 325 pounds. 
 
 Fig. 41. 
 
 Round Pointed and Square 
 Shovels 
 
 Courtesy of Acme Road Machinery 
 Company, Frankfort, New York 
 
 Fig. 42. Typical Road Plow 
 Courtesy of Western Wheeled Scraper Company, Aurora, Illinois 
 
 Hardpan Plow. Fig. 43 illustrates a plow specially designed 
 for tearing up macadam, gravel, or similar material. The point is 
 a straight bar of cast steel drawn down to a point, and can be 
 repaired easily r 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 63 
 
 Scrapers. Scrapers are used generally to move the material 
 loosened by plowing; they are made of either iron or steel, and in a 
 
 Fig. 43. Typical Hardpan or Rooter Plow 
 Courtesy Western Wheeled Scraper Company, Aurora, Illinois 
 
 variety of forms, and are known by various names, as "drag", "buck", 
 "pole", and "wheeled". The drag scrapers are employed usually 
 on short hauls, the wheeled 
 ones on long hauls. 
 
 Drag Scrapers. Drag 
 scrapers, Fig. 44, are made 
 in three sizes. The smallest, 
 for one horse, has a capacity 
 of 3 cubic feet; the others, 
 for two horses, have a 
 capacity of 5 to 7J cubic 
 feet. The smallest weighs 
 about 90 pounds, and the 
 
 Fig. 44. Drag Scraper 
 
 Courtesy Western Wheeled Scraper Company,. 
 Aurora, Illinois 
 
 Fig. 45. Buck Scraper 
 
 Courtesy Western Wheeled Scraper Company, 
 
 Aurora, Illinois 
 
 larger ones from 94 to 102 pounds. 
 
 Buck Scrapers. Buck scrapers, 
 Fig. 45, are made in two sizes 
 two-rhorse, carrying 7J cubic feet; 
 four-horse, ,12 cubic feet. 
 
 Pole Scrapers. Pole scrapers 
 are designed for use in making and 
 leveling earth roads and for cutting 
 and cleaning ditches; they are well 
 adapted also for moving earth short 
 distances at a minimum cost. 
 
64 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Wheeled Scrapers. Wheeled scrapers, Fig. 46, consist of a metal 
 box, usually steel, mounted on wheels, and furnished with levers for 
 raising, lowering, and dumping. They are operated in the same 
 
 Fig. 46. Typical Wheeled Scraper 
 Courtesy Western Wheeled Scraper Company, Aurora, Illinois 
 
 manner as drag scrapers, except that all the movements are made 
 by means of the levers, and without stopping the team. By their 
 use the excessive resistance to traction of the drag scraper is avoided. 
 
 Fig. 47. Contractor's Barrow with Pressed-Steel Tray 
 Courtesy of Acme Road Machinery Company, Frankfort, New York 
 
 Various sizes are made, ranging in capacity from 10 to 17 cubic feet. 
 In weight they range from 350 to 700 pounds. 
 
 Wheelbarrows. Wheelbarrows sometimes are constructed of 
 wood and are employed most commonly for earthwork. Their 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 65 
 
 capacities range from 2 to 2| cubic feet. Weight is about 50 pounds. 
 
 The barrow, Fig. 47, has pressed-steel tray, oak frame, and 
 steel wheels, and will be found more durable in the maintenance 
 department than the all-wood barrow. Capacity is from 3J to 5 
 cubic feet, dependent on size of tray. 
 
 The barrow, Fig. 48, is constructed with tubular-iron frames 
 and steel tray, and is adaptable to the heaviest work, such as mov- 
 
 Fig. 48. All Steel and Iron Concrete Barrow 
 Courtesy of Acme Road Machinery Company, Frankfort, New York 
 
 ing heavy broken stone, etc., or it may be employed with advantage 
 in the cleaning department. Capacity from 3 to 4 cubic feet. 
 Weight from 70 to 82 pounds. 
 
 The maximum distance to which earth can be moved econom- 
 ically in barrows is about 200 feet. The wheeling should be per- 
 
 Fig. 49. Typical Dump Carts for Hauling Earth, Etc. 
 Courtesy of Western Wheeled Scraper Company, Aurora, Illinois 
 
 formed upon planks, whose steepest inclination should not exceed 1 
 in 12. The force required to move a barrow on a plank is about -%% 
 part of the weight; on hard dry earth, about y^ part of the weight. 
 The time occupied in loading a barrow will vary with the 
 character of the material and the proportion of wheelers to shovel- 
 ers. Approximately, a shoveler takes about as long to fill a barrow 
 
66 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 with earth as a wheeler takes to wheel a full barrow a distance of 
 about 100 or 120 feet on a horizontal plank and return with the 
 empty barrow. 
 
 Fig. 50. Rear View of Typical Dump Wagon Showing Bottom Open 
 Courtesy of Western Wheeled Scraper Company, Aurora, Illinois 
 
 Carts. The cart usually employed for hauling earth, etc., is 
 shown in Fig. 49. The average capacity is 22 cubic feet, and the 
 average weight is 800 pounds. These carts are furnished usually 
 
 Fig. 51. Twenty-Yard Dump Car 
 Courtesy ojf Western Wheeled Scraper Company, Aurora, Illinois 
 
 with broad tires, and the body is balanced so that the load is evenly 
 divided about the axle. 
 
 The time required to load a cart varies with the material. 
 One shoveler will require about as follows: clay, 7 minutes; loam, 
 6 minutes; sand, 5 minutes. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 67 
 
 Dump Wagons. The use of dump wagons, Fig. 50, for moving 
 excavated earth, etc., and for transporting materials such as sand, 
 gravel, etc., materially shortens the time required for unloading the 
 ordinary form of contractor's wagon; having no reach or pole con- 
 necting the rear axle with the center bearing of the front axle, they 
 may be cramped short and the load deposited just where required. 
 They are operated by the driver, and the capacity ranges from 35 
 to 45 cubic feet. 
 
 Fig. 52. Typical Grader 
 Courtesy of Acme Road Machinery Company, Frankfort, New York 
 
 Dump Cars. Dump cars, Fig. 51, are made to dump in several 
 different ways, viz, single or double side, single or double end, and 
 rotary or universal dumpers. 
 
 Dump cars may be operated singly or in trains, as the magni- 
 tude of the work may demand. They may be moved by horses 
 or small locomotives. They are made in various sizes, depending 
 upon the gage of the track on which they are run. A common 
 gage is 20 inches, but it varies from that up to the standard railroad 
 gage of 56J inches. 
 
 Mechanical Graders. Mechanical graders are used extensively 
 in the making and maintaining of earth roads. They excavate 
 and move earth more expeditiously and economically than can be 
 

 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 69 
 
 done by hand; they are called by various names, such as "road 
 machines", "graders", "road hones", etc. 
 
 Simple Graders. Briefly described, graders consist of a large 
 blade, Fig. 52, made entirely of steel, iron, or wood shod with steel, 
 which is so arranged by a mechanism attached to the frame from 
 which it is suspended that it can be adjusted and fixed in any 
 direction by the operator. In their action they combine the work 
 of excavating and transporting the earth. They have been 
 employed chiefly in the forming and maintenance of earth roads, 
 but also may be used advantageously in preparing the subgrade 
 surface of roads for the reception of broken stone or other 
 improved covering. 
 
 Elevating Graders. Some graders combine the function of 
 elevating the material, of excavating it from side ditches, and 
 of loading it automatically into carts or wagons. Briefly described, 
 the machine, Fig. 53, consists of a plow which loosens and raises 
 the earth, depositing it upon a transverse carrying belt, which con- 
 veys it from excavation to embankment. Carrier frames of two 
 or three different lengths are provided with the machine, the distance 
 of the end of the elevator from the plow varying from 15 to 30 feet. 
 The carrier belt is of heavy 3-ply rubber 3 feet wide. 
 
 The plow and carrier are supported by a strong trussed frame- 
 work resting on heavy steel axles and broad wheels. The large 
 rear wheels are ratcheted upon the axle, and connected with strong 
 gearing which propels the carrying belt at right angles to the direc- 
 tion in which the machine is moving. 
 
 The wheels and trusses are low and broad, occupying a space 
 8 feet wide and 14 feet long, exclusive of the side carrier. This 
 enables it to work on hillsides where any wheeled implements can 
 be used. Notwithstanding its large size it is so flexible that it may 
 be turned around on a 16-foot embankment. Pilot wheels and 
 levers enable the operator to raise or lower the plow or carrier at 
 pleasure. 
 
 For motive power, 12 horses 8 driven in front, 4 abreast, and 
 4 in the rear on a push cart are usually employed. 
 
 When the teams are started, the operator lowers the plow and 
 throws the belting into gear, and as the plow raises and turns the 
 earth to the side the belt receives and delivers it at the distance for 
 
70 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 which the carrier is adjusted, forming either excavation or embank- 
 ment, as the case may be. 
 
 When it becomes necessary to deliver the excavated earth 
 beyond the capacity of the machine, the earth is loaded upon wagons, 
 
 Fig. 54. Two Views of Elevating Graders Loading Earth into Dump Wagons 
 Courtesy of Western Wheeled Scraper Company, Aurora, Illinois 
 
 then conveyed to any distance. By adjusting the height of the 
 carrier, the wagons are driven under it, Fig. 54, and loaded with 
 H to 1J yards of earth in from 20 to 30 seconds. When one wagon 
 turns out with its load, another drives under the carrier, and the 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 71 
 
 machine thus loads 600 to 800 wagons per day. It is claimed that 
 with six teams and three men it is capable of excavating and placing 
 in embankment from 1,000 to 1,500 cubic yards of earth in 10 hours, 
 or of loading from 600 to 800 wagons in the same time, and that the 
 cost of this handling is from 1J to 2J cents per cubic yard. 
 
 Points to be Considered in Selecting a Road Machine. In the 
 selection of a road machine the following points should be carefully 
 considered : thoroughness and simplicity of its mechanical construc- 
 tion; material and workmanship used in its construction; safety 
 to the operator; ease of operation; lightness of draft; and adapta- 
 bility to general road work, ditching, etc. 
 
 Care of Road Machines. The road machine when not in use 
 should be stored in a dry house and thoroughly cleaned, its blade 
 brushed clean from all accumulations of mud, wiped thoroughly 
 dry, and well covered with grease or crude oil. The axles, journals, 
 and wearing parts should be kept well oiled when in use, and an 
 extra blade should be kept on hand to avoid stopping the machine 
 while the dulled one is being sharpened. 
 
 Surface Graders. The surface grader is used for removing 
 earth previously loosened by a plow. It is operated by one horse. 
 
 Fig. 55. Simple Road Leveler 
 
 The load may be retained and carried a considerable distance, or 
 it may be spread gradually as the operator desires. It is also 
 employed to level off and trim the surface following the scrapers. 
 
 The blade is of steel, \ inch thick, 15 inches wide, and 30 inches 
 long. The beam and other parts are of oak and iron. Weight 
 about 60 pounds. 
 
 Road Leveler. The road leveler, Fig. 55, is used for trimming 
 and smoothing the surface of earth roads. It is largely employed in 
 the spring when the frost leaves the ground. 
 
72 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 The blade is of steel, J-inch thick by 4 inches by 72 inches, and 
 is provided with a seat for the driver. It is operated by a team of 
 horses. Weight about 150 pounds. 
 
 Ditching Tools. The tools employed for digging the ditches 
 and shaping the bottom to fit the drain tiles are shown in Fig. 56. 
 They are convenient to use, and expedite the work by avoiding 
 unnecessary excavation. 
 
 The tools are used as follows: Nos. 3, 4, and 5 are used for 
 digging the ditches; Nos. 6 and 7 for cleaning and rounding the 
 
 Fig. 56. Typical Tools Used for Digging Ditches 
 
 bottom of the ditch for round tile; No. 2 is used for shoveling out 
 loose earth and leveling the bottom of the ditch; No. 1 is used for 
 the same purpose when the ditch is intended for "sole" tile. 
 
 Sprinkling Wagons. A convenient form of sprinkling wagon 
 for suburban streets and country roads is shown in Fig. 57. The 
 tank is of 12 gage steel and its capacity is 380 to 600 gallons. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 73 
 
 Road Rollers. Horse-Drawn Rollers. There are a number of 
 types of horse-drawn rollers on the market, consisting essentially 
 
 Fig. 57. Steel 'lank Sprinkling Wagon 
 Courtesy of Acme Road Machinery Company, Frankfort, New York 
 
 of a hollow cast-iron cylinder 4 to 5 feet long, 5 to 6 feet in 
 diameter, and weighing from 3 to 6 tons. Some forms are 
 
 Fig. 58. Ten-Ton Steam-Driven Road Roller 
 Courtesy of Charles Longenecker & Company, New York City 
 
 provided with boxes in which stone or iron may be placed to 
 increase the weight, and some have closed ends and may be filled 
 
74 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 with water or sand. The use today of small gasoline road rollers 
 makes this type less prevalent than formerly. 
 
 Power-Propelled Rollers. The rollers employed for compacting 
 the natural soil and all forms of broken-stone pavements usually 
 are of the three-wheel type, operated by steam or gasoline, Fig. 58. 
 They generally are arranged to move at two speeds, low and high; 
 the low speed is from 2 to 3 miles per hour and the high speed from 
 4 to 5 miles. The low speed is employed for compacting the natural 
 soil and the foundation; the high speed is employed for finishing 
 the surface. The driving wheels are furnished with lock pins or 
 differential gears to permit them to accommodate themselves auto- 
 matically to the difference in speeds when operating on sharp curves. 
 They vary in weight from 10 to 20 tons. 
 
 Scarifiers. The implement used for breaking up a broken- 
 stone road preparatory to applying a new surface is called a "scari- 
 
 ng. 59. Scarifier, for Quick and Economical Repair of Macadam Roads 
 Courtesy of Charles Longenecker & Company, New York City 
 
 fier", Fig. 59. It usually consists of a cast-iron block, weighing 
 about 3 tons, mounted on 2 or 4 wheels; the block is fitted with a 
 series of spikes or picks, arranged either in one line, or in two lines 
 forming a V; means are provided for adjusting the depth to which 
 the picks penetrate, the maximum depth being about 6 inches. 
 The scarifier is operated by being attached to the rear of a steam 
 roller or traction engine which hauls it over the road. 
 
 NATURAL=SOIL ROADS 
 
 Earth Roads. The term "earth road" is applied to roads 
 where the surface consists of the native soil; this class of road is the 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 75 
 
 most common and cheapest in first cost. At certain seasons of the 
 year earth roads, when properly cared for, are second to none, but 
 during the spring and wet seasons they" are very deficient in the 
 important requisite of hardness, and are almost impassable. 
 
 For the construction of new earth roads, all the principles pre- 
 viously discussed relating to alignment, grades, drainage, width, etc., 
 should be followed carefully. The crown or transverse contour 
 should be greater than in stone roads; 12 inches at the center in 25 
 feet will be sufficient. 
 
 Drainage is especially important, because the material of the 
 road is more susceptible to the action of water, and more easily 
 destroyed by it than are the materials used in the construction of the 
 better class of roads. When water is allowed to stand upon the 
 road, the earth is softened, the wagon wheels penetrate it, and the 
 horses' feet mix and knead it until it becomes impassable mud. The 
 action of frost is also apt to be disastrous upon the more permeable 
 surface of the earth road, having the effect of swelling and heaving 
 the roadway and throwing its surface out of shape. It may in fact 
 be said that the whole problem of the improvement and mainte- 
 nance of ordinary country roads is one of drainage. 
 
 In the preparation of the wheelway all stumps, brush, vegetable 
 matter, rocks, and boulders should be removed from the surface and 
 the resulting holes filled in with clean earth. The roadbed, having 
 been brought to the required grade and crown, should be thoroughly 
 rolled; all inequalities appearing during the rolling should be filled 
 up and re-rolled. 
 
 Care of Earth Roads. If the surface of the roadway is prop- 
 erly formed and kept smooth, the water will be shed into the side 
 ditches and do comparatively little harm; but if it remains upon the 
 surface, it will be absorbed and convert the road into mud. All 
 ruts and depressions should be filled up as soon as they appear. 
 Repairs should be attended to particularly in the spring. At that 
 season the judicious use of a road machine and rollers will make a 
 smooth road. In summer when the surface gets rough it can be 
 improved by running a harrow over it; if the surface is a little muddy 
 this treatment will hasten the drying. 
 
 During the fall the surface should be repaired, with special 
 reference to putting it in shape to withstand the ravages of winter. 
 
76 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Saucer-like depressions and ruts should be filled up with clean earth 
 similar to that of the roadbed and tamped into place. 
 
 The side ditches should be examined in the fall to see that they 
 are free from dead weeds and grass, and late in winter they should 
 be examined again to see that they are not clogged. The mouths 
 of culverts should be cleaned of rubbish and the outlet of tile drains 
 opened. Attention to the side ditches will prevent overflow and 
 washing of the roadway, and also will prevent the formation of 
 ponds at the roadside and the consequent saturation of the roadbed. 
 
 Holes and ruts should not be filled with stone, bricks, gravel, 
 or other material harder than the earth of the roadway as the hard 
 material will not wear uniformly with the rest of the road, but 
 produce bumps and ridges, and usually result in making two holes, 
 each larger than the original one. It is bad practice to cut a gutter 
 
 Fig. 60 fcsteel Road Drag 
 Courtesy of Western Wheeled Scraper Company, Aurora, Illinois 
 
 from a hole to drain it to the side of the road. Filling is the proper 
 course, whether the hole is dry or contains mud. 
 
 The maintaining of smooth surfaces on all classes of earth roads 
 will be assisted and cheapened greatly by the frequent use of a 
 roller (either steam or horse) and any one of the various forms of 
 road grading and scraping machines. In repairing an earth road 
 the plow should not be used. It breaks up the surface which has 
 been compacted by time and travel. 
 
 In the maintenance of earth roads the road drag, Fig. 60, or 
 some similar device, is indispensable. The drag should be light 
 and should be hauled along the road at an angle of about 45 degrees, 
 so that only a small amount of earth is pushed to the center of the 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 77 
 
 road. The driver should ride on the drag and not drive faster 
 than a walk. Dragging should begin on the side of the road, or 
 wheel track, and return on the opposite side. Unless the road is 
 in good condition, it should be dragged after every heavy rain. 
 
 In the maintenance of clay roads neither sods nor turf should 
 be used to fill holes or ruts; for, though at first deceptively tough, 
 they soon decay and form the softest mud. Neither should the ruts 
 be filled with field stones; they will not wear uniformly with the 
 rest of the road, but will produce hard ridges. 
 
 Trees and close hedges should not be allowed within 200 feet 
 of a clay road. It requires all the sun and wind possible to keep its 
 surface in a dry and hard condition. 
 
 Sand Roads. The aim in the improvement of sand roads is to 
 have the wheelway as narrow and well defined as possible, so as to 
 have all vehicles run in the same track. An abundant growth 
 of vegetation should be encouraged on each side of the wheelway, 
 for by this means the shearing of the sand is, in a great measure, 
 avoided. Ditching beyond a slight depth to carry away the rain 
 water is not desirable, for it tends to hasten the drying of the sands, 
 which is to be avoided. Where possible the roads should be over- 
 hung with trees, the leaves and twigs of which, catching on the 
 wheelway, will serve still further to diminish the effect of the wheels 
 in moving the sands about. If clay can be obtained, a coating 6 
 inches thick will be found a most efficient and economical improve- 
 ment. A coating of 4 inches of loose straw will, after a few days' 
 travel, grind into the sand and become as hard and firm as a dry 
 clay road. 
 
 Sand=Clay Roads. A sand-clay road is formed by mixing 
 clay and sand in such proportions that the clay will just fill the 
 voids in the sand, and produce a mixture that is neither sticky nor 
 friable, but coheres in a comparatively dry plastic mass when com- 
 pacted with pressure. If an insufficient amount of clay is used, 
 the mixture will not bind; if an excess of clay is used, the road will 
 be sticky and muddy after a fall of rain. 
 
 The grains of sand furnish the hard material to resist the 
 abrasion of the traffic; the clay provides the cementing or binding 
 medium to hold the sand together. All clays are not equally satis- 
 factory as binders, owing to the diversity of their origin. A common 
 
78 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 test for clay suitable for road purposes is to apply a wet finger 
 to a piece of clay; if the clay adheres to the finger, it may be assumed 
 reasonably that it will adhere to the sand. 
 
 The natural sand soils and the naturel clay soils are improved 
 by the application of the sand-clay mixture, the method of applying 
 it being varied according to which kind of soil is to be treated. 
 
 Applying Sand-Clay Mixture to Clay Soil. In the treatment 
 of a clay soil, the soil is plowed to a depth of 6 to 8 inches; then 
 pulverized by harrowing, and, if necessary, by rolling with a light 
 roller and again harrowing. After the clay is thoroughly pulverized, 
 the sand is spread over the surface in a layer from 6 to 8 inches 
 thick, and the sand and clay are thoroughly mixed by continued 
 harrowing. After the dry mixing has been accomplished satis- 
 factorily, the surface is moistened slightly by sprinkling with water, 
 then compacted by rolling, after which a road machine or grader 
 is used to give the required crown; and then the roller is again applied 
 until the surface becomes smooth and hard. 
 
 Applying Sand-Clay Mixture to Sand Soil. In the treatment 
 of a sand soil, the clay is spread over the surface in a layer, ranging 
 from 4 to 8 inches thick; then mixed with the sand by harrowing. 
 After that it is sprinkled heavily with water and again worked 
 with the harrow; then it is shaped and rolled in the same manner 
 as stated above for a clay soil. 
 
 The sand-clay roads require considerable attention, after 
 completion, to eliminate weak or defective spots by applying sand 
 or clay, as may be required. 
 
 Application of Oil to Sand and Gravel Soils. Sand and gravel 
 soils are improved by the application of crude petroleum or asphal- 
 tic oils. The oil abates dust; forms a non-absorbent surface which 
 turns off rain water and decreases the amount of mud; and furnishes 
 a dark-colored road surface which is more pleasing to the eye than 
 the ordinary light color. 
 
 The roadbed is prepared to receive the oil by grading, shaping, 
 and rolling. The oil is applied to the prepared surface by sprinkling 
 from tank wagons; the oil coat is covered with a thin layer of sand, 
 after which the roller is applied again. If during the rolling the 
 surface becomes sticky, or dry and dusty, dry sand or more oil is 
 added as required. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 79 
 
 ROADS WITH SPECIAL COVERINGS 
 
 Elements of a Road Covering. The wheelways of roads and 
 streets are prepared for traffic by placing upon the natural soil a 
 covering of some suitable material which will furnish a comparatively 
 smooth surface on which the resistance to traction will be reduced 
 to the least possible amount, and over which all classes of vehicles 
 may pass with safety and expedition at all seasons of the year. 
 The covering usually consists of two parts: a foundation, and a 
 wearing surface. 
 
 The functions of the foundation are as follows: (1) to protect 
 the soil from disturbance and the injurious effects of surface water; 
 
 (2) to transmit to and distribute over a sufficiently large area of 
 the soil the weight of the loads imposed upon the wearing coat; 
 
 (3) to support unyieldingly the wearing surface and the loads coming 
 upon it. 
 
 The efficiency of the wearing surface depends entirely upon 
 the quality of the foundation. If the foundation be weak, the 
 wearing surface will be disrupted speedily, no matter how well 
 constructed. 
 
 FOUNDATIONS 
 
 Materials. The foundation, when once constructed, should 
 not require to be disturbed nor reconstructed. The materials 
 employed in its construction may be the cheapest available, such 
 as local rock, gravel, sand, furnace slag, etc., the important point 
 in the design being to provide sufficient thickness, so that when 
 consolidated it will maintain its form under the heaviest traffic 
 liable to come upon it. If the foundation and the covering yield 
 under the load, an upheaval is caused that disrupts the bond and 
 hastens the destruction of the road. 
 
 Thickness. The thickness of the foundation depends upon 
 the supporting power of the natural soil and the weight of the loads 
 coming upon the wearing surface. The supporting or bearing 
 power of the soil can be ascertained by direct test, and the weight 
 of the loads by a survey of the traffic plus a provision for future 
 increase. 
 
 Recent tests indicate that non-porous soils from which the 
 subsoil water is removed by drainage will support in their worst 
 
80 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 condition a load of about 4 pounds per square inch; and that if 
 the thickness of the foundation be adjusted to the traffic on this 
 basis it will be safe at all seasons of the year. 
 
 Methods of Calculating Thickness of Covering. There are two 
 theories as to the manner in which pressure of a loaded wheel is 
 transmitted from the surface of the covering to the natural soil: 
 (1) that the pressure on the soil varies inversely as the cube of the 
 thickness of the foundation and the wearing surface; (2) that the 
 pressure is transmitted downwards in the form of a truncated cone, 
 the lines of which diverge at an angle varying from 30 to 50 degrees 
 from the vertical, according to the solidity of the covering. If 
 the surface of the road is uneven or obstructed by loose stones, 
 the lines of pressure are more concentrated when the wheels pass 
 over such obstacles. 
 
 The latter theory is the one most frequently applied. The 
 calculation is performed as follows: Let P be distributed pressure 
 on the soil, per square inch; A, length of arc of wheel tire in contact 
 with surface in square inches; W, width of tire in inches; L, load 
 carried by wheel in pounds; F, depth of wearing surface and foun- 
 dation in inches; C, area of contact equal to AxW; and B, area 
 of base at surface of natural soil. The area of the base is 
 
 B = (2F+A) &F+W) 
 The distributed pressure is 
 
 p= _ L_ = L 
 
 (2F+A) (2F+W) B 
 
 Assuming that the load is 1,000 pounds per inch of tire width; the 
 tire, 3 inches; length of contact 3 inches; total thickness of the 
 wearing coat and the foundation 12 inches; the pressure on the 
 soil is 
 
 1000X3 _ 3000 = = llolb j 
 
 "(2X12+3) (2X12+3)" 27X27" 729 ~ 
 
 According to this theory the thickness of the covering varies 
 from 4 to 16 inches, the smallest thickness being placed upon gravel 
 or sand and the greatest upon clay. 
 
 Preparation of Foundation. The preparation of the foundation 
 involves two distinct operations: (1) preparation of the natural 
 soil; and (2) placing an artificial foundation upon the Drepared 
 natural soil. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 81 
 
 The essentials necessary to the preparation of the natural 
 soil are: (1) the entire removal of perishable vegetable and yielding 
 matter; (2) the drainage of the soil where necessary; (3) the improv- 
 ing of the bearing power of the soil where required; and (4) compact- 
 ing the soil. 
 
 All soils are improved by rolling, and weak spots, which other- 
 wise would pass unnoticed, are discovered. However, care must 
 be taken that the weight of the roller employed is not too great for 
 the bearing power of the soil ; if it exceed this the surface of the soil 
 will be formed into a series of undulations that will cause the wear- 
 ing coat to fail; the same condition may be produced by excessive 
 rolling with a comparatively light roller. Each soil requires different 
 treatment. 
 
 Soils of a siliceous and calcareous nature may be improved by 
 drainage and the addition of a layer of clay 2 to 6 inches thick, 
 mixed with the soil and compacted by rolling. The argillaceous 
 and allied soils, owing to their retentive nature, are very unstable 
 under the action of water and frost, and in their natural condition 
 afford a defective foundation. They are improved by thorough 
 drainage and the admixture of sand well rolled, together with the 
 placing upon the surface of the compacted soil a layer 2 to 6 inches 
 thick of sand, slag, cinders, or other material of a similar nature, 
 and then compacting it by sprinkling with water and rolling. 
 
 Types of Foundation to Be Used. The essential requisite in the 
 construction of the artificial foundation is that it be a dense mass, 
 and the type of foundation to be employed varies with the char- 
 acter of the wearing surface. For the various types of broken- 
 stone surfaces, the foundation may be composed of blocks of stone 
 (ledge rock or fieldstones), roughly shaped to a rectangular form, 
 ranging in width and depth from 6 to 8 inches and in length from 
 6 to 16 inches. They are set by hand on the soil bed with the length 
 at right angles to the axis of the roadway, so arranged that they 
 break joints. The edges that project above the subgrade level are 
 broken off with hand hammers, and the spaces between them are 
 filled with chips of stone well packed and wedged in. The blocks 
 are brought then to a firm bearing by rolling with a steam roller, 
 after which the wearing surface is laid. The foundation also may 
 be composed of broken stone, gravel, or furnace slag so graded that 
 
82 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 the voids will be reduced to the smallest possible amount. The 
 voids may be filled with stone dust; a mixture of sand and clay; a 
 mortar and grout composed of hydraulic cement and sand; bitu- 
 minous cement; or hydraulic-cement concrete, mixed and placed 
 upon the soil bed. 
 
 WEARING SURFACES 
 
 Functions of Wearing Surface. The office of the wearing sur- 
 face is to protect the foundation from the wear of the traffic and the 
 effects of surface water, and to support the weight of the traffic and 
 transmit it to the foundation. To render efficient service to the 
 traffic, it must furnish a comparatively smooth unyielding surface 
 that affords good foothold for draft animals and good adhesion for 
 motor vehicles, and on which the resistance to traction will be a 
 minimum. To fill its office satisfactorily the material of which it is 
 composed must possess strength to resist crushing and abrasion, 
 and its fabric must be practically impervious. To render economical 
 service, it must possess the power of resisting the action of the 
 destroying agencies for a reasonable length of time before it becomes 
 unfit for use. For this purpose it must possess the resisting quali- 
 ties previously stated, and it must also possess a certain thickness; 
 this thickness will depend upon the character of the material 
 employed and its rate of wear under the given traffic and atmospheric 
 conditions. Economy is not promoted by using a thick wearing 
 surface, as under heavy traffic it will be so worn in a few years as to 
 be unserviceable, and under light traffic it will be decomposed before 
 it is worn out. In either case it must be removed and the portion 
 so removed is waste; therefore, only such thickness as will give 
 efficient service during a few years should be adopted. 
 
 Thickness. The measure for the economical thickness of any 
 type of wearing surface is that the annual interest charge on the 
 first cost plus the annual depreciation shall be a minimum. To 
 apply this measure it is necessary to know the amount of traffic and 
 the loss of thickness due to wear. 
 
 Classification of Wearing Surfaces. The wearing surfaces 
 most commonly employed for roads and streets are composed of: 
 (1) gravel, broken stone, furnace slag, and similar granular materials 
 bound with colloidal cement formed by the action of water on the 
 plastic elements of rock and clay; (2) broken stone, gravel, and sand 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 83 
 
 bound with: (a) bituminous cement; (b) hydraulic cement; (3) stone 
 blocks; (4) brick; (5) wood blocks. 
 
 In type (1), a certain amount of moisture is essential to success- 
 ful binding. When this is lacking, as in the summer season, the 
 binding material becomes dry and brittle, and the fragments at the 
 surface are displaced by the action of the traffic; an excess of mois- 
 ture destroys the binding power; and the surface is quickly broken 
 up by the traffic. 
 
 Wearing surfaces of type (2a) are usually limited in life not 
 merely by the wear of traffic, but by the fact that all bitumens. slowly 
 alter in chemical composition when exposed to atmospheric action, 
 and in time become brittle. Type (2b) is subject to cracking under 
 expansion and contracting, due to changes of temperature, and is 
 liable to w r ear unevenly owing to irregularity in mixing and the segre- 
 gation of the ingredients while the concrete is being put in place. 
 When a defective spot begins to wear, it extends very rapidly under 
 the abrasive action of the traffic. 
 
 The materials of types (3) and (4) seldom rot or disintegrate 
 and, when the pavement is well constructed, are eminently enduring 
 and generally render satisfactory service. Since the use of creosote 
 and other preservatives has increased the service life of wood blocks, 
 type (5), by lessening their tendency to decay, they have come into 
 extensive use for street paving. 
 
 Gravel Roads 
 
 Gravel. Gravel consists of smooth and somewhat rounded 
 stones, varying in size from small grains to pebbles 4 or more inches 
 in diameter. It is found mixed with sand, on the banks and in the 
 beds of rivers; and in deposits on the land, mixed with clay and other 
 mineral substances, such as limestone and oxide of iron, from which 
 it derives a distinctive name. Gravel of the latter class is called 
 cementatious and when suitably prepared cements together, forming 
 a very satisfactory roadway for light traffic, producing but little 
 dust in dry weather and costing little to maintain. 
 
 Preparation of Gravel. Gravel is best prepared for use by 
 screening into three grades: grade (I), containing the stones retained 
 by a IJ-inch mesh screen and passing a 2J-inch mesh; grade (2), 
 containing the stones retained by a i-inch mesh and passing a 1 J-inch 
 
84 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 mesh; grade (3), containing all the material passing the J-inch 
 mesh. The voids in grade (1) are determined, and enough of grade 
 (3) added slightly more than to fill them; the two are intimately 
 and evenly mixed and the mixture is used for the first or lower 
 course. The voids in grade (2) are determined and a sufficient 
 quantity of grade (3) added to fill them ; the two are mixed and used 
 for the top course. The mixture should be combined very evenly 
 so that the fine material is mixed uniformly with the coarse ; and in 
 spreading the mixture, care should be taken to avoid separating it 
 or allowing the fine material to settle to the bottom. 
 
 If the gravel is deficient in binding material, the latter may be 
 added in the form of clay, loam, limestone screenings, shale, or marl, 
 the amount added ranging from 10 to 15 per cent. An excess (20 
 per cent) of clay causes the gravel to pack quickly and to present a 
 good appearance under the rolling; but in dry weather the road will 
 ravel, become defective and dusty, and in wet weather it will be 
 muddy. Clean smooth gravel will not consolidate without a binder 
 and, unless this is of very good quality, a road made with it will 
 prove unsatisfactory. 
 
 Laying the Gravel. On the natural-soil bed properly graded 
 and compacted, the prepared gravel is spread uniformly to the 
 depth desired usually 6 inches. Then it is compacted by rolling 
 with a steam roller, after which it is moistened by sprinkling with 
 water, and the rolling is repeated. The sprinkling and rolling are 
 repeated as often as may be required, until the stones cease to rise 
 or creep in front of the roller. The second course then is spread to 
 a depth of about 4 inches, rolled, sprinkled, and again rolled in the 
 same manner and to the same extent as the first course. After this, 
 a thin coat of the fine screenings is spread over the surface and the 
 traffic is admitted. 
 
 If, during the rolling, the first course appears to be deficient in 
 binding material, more may be added by spreading a thin layer of 
 the fine material over the surface of the course, sprinkling and 
 rolling, as above described. 
 
 If, during the rolling of the top course, any stones larger than 
 1| inches appear, they must be removed. 
 
 Gravel shrinks in rolling about 20 per cent of its loose depth; 
 therefore, to obtain a thickness of 8 inches when compacted, the 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 85 
 
 loose material should have a depth of about 10 inches. The thick- 
 ness of the gravel coating varies according to the nature of the 
 roadbed, a thicker layer being necessary on impermeable soil than 
 on a well-drained soil. 
 
 The pebbles in a gravel road are imbedded in a paste and can be 
 displaced easily. It is for this reason, among others, that such 
 roads are subject to internal destruction. 
 
 The binding power of clay depends in a large measure upon 
 the state of the weather. During rainy periods a gravel road 
 becomes soft and muddy, while in very dry weather the clay will 
 contract and crack, thus releasing the pebbles, and causing a loose 
 surface. The most favorable conditions are obtained in moderately 
 damp or dry weather, during which a gravel road offers several 
 advantages for light traffic, the character of the drainage, etc., 
 largely determining durability, cost, maintenance, etc. 
 
 Repair. Gravel roads constructed as above described will need 
 only small repairs for some years, but daily attention is required in 
 making these. A garden rake should be kept at hand to draw any 
 loose gravel into the wheel tracks, and for filling any depressions 
 that may occur. 
 
 In making repairs, it is best to apply a small quantity of gravel 
 at a time, unless it is a spot which actually has cut through. Two 
 inches of gravel at once is more profitable than a larger amount. 
 Where a thick coating is applied at once it does not all pack, and if, 
 after the surface is solid, a cut be made, loose gravel will be found; 
 this holds water and makes the road heave and become spouty 
 under the action of frost. It will cost no more to apply 6 inches of 
 gravel at three different times than to do it at once. 
 
 At every J mile a few cubic yards of gravel should be stored to 
 be used in filling depressions and ruts as fast as they appear, and 
 there should be at least one laborer to every 5 miles of road. 
 
 Broken=Stone Roads 
 
 Methods of Construction. Broken-stone roads are formed in 
 several different ways. For example, the road may be formed by 
 placing one or two layers of stone broken into small fragments 
 upon: (1) the natural soil; (2) a foundation composed of large stone 
 set by hand upon the natural soil ; or (3) a foundation layer of cement 
 
86 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 87 
 
 concrete. The layers of broken stone are compacted by rolling 
 with a heavy roller and the interstices, or spaces between the stones 
 are filled with a binder composed either of stone dust; stone 
 dust and clay; a grout of hydraulic or Portland cement; or a bitu- 
 minous cement derived from either coal tar or asphalt, and used 
 alone or mixed with sand. The broken stone forming the lower 
 surface layer often is coated with a bituminous cement before placing 
 it upon the foundation. This applies particularly when the upper 
 layer is of bituminous cement. The broken stone also may be 
 mixed with Portland cement and sand, forming a concrete, which 
 is placed either upon the prepared natural soil or upon a concrete 
 or broken-stone foundation. 
 
 The several methods for constructing broken-stone roads are 
 distinguished by either a specific name or the name of the introducer. 
 Thus, the types known as Telford and Macadam are named 
 from Thomas Telford and John L. McAdam, Scottish engineers, 
 who introduced them in England during the early part of the 19th 
 Century, as an improvement of the method employed in the 18th 
 Century by M. Tresaguet on the roads of France. Telford used a 
 base of large stones, Fig. 61, upon which the small stone was placed. 
 McAdam omitted the base contending that it was useless and 
 injurious. Both constructors insisted on thorough drainage of the 
 subsoil, but neither used a binder and rolling was unknown. The 
 stones were left to be compacted by the traffic. The introduction of 
 stone-crushing machinery and rollers as well as the practice (con- 
 demned by McAdam, but advocated by Mr. Edgeworth, an Irish 
 landowner in his treatise on Road Building published in 1817) of filling 
 the voids with a binder has caused material departures from the 
 methods of the pioneers whose names are still but improperly applied. 
 
 The cement grouting was introduced in England by Sir John 
 Macneil. The coating of the stone with coal tar was first prac- 
 ticed in England about 1840, and was called "tar-macadam". In 
 recent times, to distinguish the several varieties of bituminous con- 
 struction, several specific terms have been coined, as "bitulithic", 
 "tarmac", "warrenite", "bituminous macadam", "asphalt macadam", 
 etc. Since the use of bituminous binding has become extensive, the 
 term "water-bound macadam" has come into use, to distinguish the 
 earlier macadam type from the types recently introduced. 
 
88 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Quality of Stones. The materials used for broken-stone pave- 
 ments of necessity must vary very much according to the locality. 
 Owing to the cost of haulage, local stone generally must be used, 
 especially if the traffic be only moderate. If, however, the traffic is 
 heavy, it sometimes will be found better and more economical to 
 obtain a superior material, even at a higher cost, than the local 
 stone; and in cases where the traffic is very great, the best material 
 that can be obtained is the most economical. 
 
 There are a number of qualities required in a stone to render 
 efficient service. Hardness and toughness, to resist the effects of 
 abrasion and impact. These two properties, while closely related, 
 are not always coincident; some rocks, although extremely hard, yet 
 are so brittle that they crush easily under impact. In others the 
 cohesion between the component particles is so weak that they are 
 worn quickly by abrasion. Durability, or power to resist the disin- 
 tegrating influences of the weather and humus acids. The quality 
 of durability depends chiefly upon the chemical stability of the 
 minerals present. Physical defects and abrasion generally cause 
 the destruction of the stone long before it is injured by chemical 
 changes. Capability of binding into a compact mass. This quality 
 is essential to stone used for water-bound macadam. The binding 
 or cementing property is possessed to a greater or less extent by all 
 rocks when in a state of disintegration. It is caused by the action 
 of water upon the chemical constituents of the stone contained in 
 the detritus material worn off produced by crushing the stone, 
 and by the friction of the fragments on each other while being com- 
 pacted; its strength varies with the different species of rock, but it 
 exists in some measure with them all, being greatest with limestone 
 and least with gneiss. 
 
 The essential condition of the stone to produce this binding 
 effect is that it be sound. No decayed stone retains the property of 
 binding, though in some few cases, where the material contains iron 
 oxides, it may, by the cementing property of the oxide, undergo a 
 certain amount of binding. 
 
 A stone of good binding nature frequently will wear much 
 better than one without, although it is not so hard. A limestone 
 road well made and of good cross section will be more impervious 
 than any other, owing to this cause, and will not disintegrate so 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 89 
 
 soon in dry weather, owing partly to this and partly to the well- 
 known quality which all limestone has of absorbing moisture from 
 the atmosphere. Mere hardness without toughness is not of much 
 use, as a stone may be very hard but so brittle as to be crushed to 
 powder under a heavy load, while a stone not so hard but having a 
 greater degree of toughness will be uninjured. 
 
 A stone for a road surface should be as little absorptive of 
 moisture as possible in order that it may not suffer injury from the 
 action of frost. Many limestones are objectionable on this account. 
 
 The stone used should be uniform in quality, otherwise it will 
 wear unevenly, and depressions will appear where the softer material 
 has been used. As the under parts of the road covering are not 
 subject to the wear of traffic, and have only the weight of loads to 
 sustain, it is not necessary that the stone of the lower layer be so 
 hard or so tough as the stone for the surface, hence it is frequently 
 possible by using an inferior stone for that portion of the work, to 
 reduce greatly the cost of construction. 
 
 Testing the Rock. In order to ascertain the probable resist- 
 ance of the different rocks to the destructive action of the traffic and 
 weather, tests are made in the laboratory to determine the resistance 
 to impact and abrasion, absorptive capacity, hardness, toughness, 
 and specific gravity. 
 
 Abrasion. The test for abrasion is conducted in the Deval type 
 of machine. It consists of two or more cast-iron cylinders mounted 
 on a shaft so that the axis of each cylinder is inclined an angle of 30 
 degrees from the axis of rotation. The cylinders' are charged with 
 11 pounds of the rock broken into fragments, ranging from 1J to 2| 
 inches. The cylinders are then rotated at a uniform speed of 2,000 
 revolutions per hour for five hours, or until the automatic recorder 
 shows 10,000 revolutions; the charge then is removed and placed 
 on a sieve having meshes of $ inch. The material retained on the 
 sieve is washed, dried, and weighed. The difference in weight 
 between the weight of the charge and the residue larger than & inch 
 shows the loss by abrasion. 
 
 Impact and Toughness. The test for impact and toughness is 
 made in a machine, consisting of an anvil, plunger, and hammer, 
 mounted in vertical guides. The test piece is placed on the anvil; 
 the hammer weighing 4.40 pounds is raised and allowed to fall a 
 
90 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 distance of one centimeter for the first blow and an increased fall of 
 one centimeter for each succeeding blow, until the test piece fails. 
 The number of blows required to destroy it is used to represent the 
 toughness; 13 blows is considered to indicate low resistance, 13 to 
 19 medium, and above 19 high. 
 
 Hardness. The test for hardness is made on a Dory machine, 
 which consists of a steel disk mounted so as to be revolved. The 
 test pieces are cylinders cut from the rock by a core drill, and the 
 ends ground level. Two pieces are used for a test; each is weighed, 
 then placed in the guides of the machine with its face resting upon 
 the grinding disk. The machine is revolved until 1000 revolutions 
 have been made, and during the operation, quartz sand is fed onto 
 the disk. The test piece is removed and weighed, and the hardness 
 is determined from the formula 
 
 W 
 
 Hardness = 20 
 o 
 
 in which W is loss in grams per 1000 revolutions. Rocks having a 
 hardness less than 14 are considered soft; from 14 to 17 medium; 
 and over 17 hard. 
 
 Water Absorption. The capacity of the stone to absorb water 
 is determined by using a thoroughly dry sample of stone weighing 
 about 12 grams. The sample is weighed in air, then immersed in 
 water where it is weighed immediately; after 96 hours' immersion it 
 is weighed again in the water. The absorptive capacity then is 
 calculated by the formula 
 
 /> _ T> 
 
 Lb. water absorbed = - X62.37 per cu. ft. of rock 
 
 in which A is the weight in air; B is the weight in water immediately 
 after immersion; C is the weight in water after immersion for 96 
 hours; and 62.37 is the normal weight in pounds of a cubic foot of 
 water. 
 
 The durability of a stone used for roads is affected to a certain 
 extent by its capability of absorbing water. In cold climates a low 
 absorptive capacity is essential to resist the disintegrating effects 
 of alternate freezing and thawing. 
 
 Specific Gravity. The specific gravity is determined either by 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 91 
 
 weighing in a specific gravity balance or by weighing in air and 
 water, and applying the formula 
 
 Specific gravity = j^rr^r 
 
 in which W is the weight in air, and W\ is the weight in water. 
 
 Specific gravity and porosity are closely related. The specific 
 gravity varies with the density or compactness of the aggregation of 
 the mineral grains forming the stone. The closer the grains the more 
 compact the stone, and the less will be the amount of interstitial 
 space and hence the less the porosity. 
 
 From the specific gravity the weight per ton or per cubic yard 
 may be determined. A knowledge of the weight is useful in decid- 
 ing between two otherwise good stones; the heavier will be the more 
 expensive, due to increased cost of transportation. On a water- 
 bound macadam road it is an advantage to have a detritus with a 
 high specific gravity, as it will not be moved so easily by rain and 
 wind as one of low specific gravity. 
 
 Cementing Quality. The cementing quality of the stone dust is 
 determined by placing 500 grams of the rock, broken to pass a J-inch 
 mesh screen, in a ball mill, together with 90 cubic centimeters of 
 water and 2 steel balls weighing 20 pounds. The mill and its charge 
 are revolved for 2J hours at a rate of 2000 revolutions per hour. 
 The operation produces a stiff dough, of which 25 grams are placed 
 in a metal die 25 millimeters in diameter, and subjected to a pressure 
 of 132 kilograms per square centimeter, producing a cylindrical test 
 piece. The test piece is dried in the air for 20 hours, after which it 
 is heated in a hot-air oven for 4 hours at a temperature of 200 
 Fahrenheit and then cooled in a desiccator for 20 minutes. When 
 cool it is tested in the impact testing machine in the same manner 
 as the test for toughness, using a hammer weighing 1 kilogram and 
 a fixed height of fall of 1 centimeter. Blows are struck until the 
 test piece fails. The average of the number of blows on 5 test 
 pieces is taken as the result of the test. A result of 10 is considered 
 to indicate a low cementing quality; 10 to 25 is considered fair; 26 
 to 75 good; 76 to 100 very good; over 100 excellent. 
 
 Species of Stone. The rocks most extensively used for broken- 
 stone roads are trap, granite, limestone, sandstone, boulders, or field- 
 stone. 
 
92 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Trap rock is hard and tough and has good wearing and binding 
 qualities. Granite is brittle and its cementing value is low. Lime- 
 stone is deficient in hardness and toughness but possesses good 
 binding qualities and for light traffic roads is eminently suitable. 
 Sandstones are rocks made up of grains of sand cemented together 
 by siliceous, ferruginous, calcareous, or argillaceous material; they 
 are usually deficient in binding quality and resistance to abrasion. 
 With a bituminous binder good results are obtained. Fieldstones 
 are a mixture of the hardest parts of the granites, sandstones, lime- 
 stones, etc., distributed by glacial action and which have resisted 
 the disintegrating effects of the weather. Owing to their variable 
 character and unequal hardness they wear irregularly and make a 
 very rough road. 
 
 Shape and Size of Stone. The shape and size of the fragments 
 of stone affect the enduring qualities of the road. The nearer the 
 fragments approach the cubical form with irregular jagged sides, 
 the more satisfactory will be the results. 
 
 The size of the stone must be such as will not fracture or crush 
 under the action of the roller during compaction nor become loosened 
 under traffic. For the harder rocks the size varies from 1J to 2| 
 inches and for the softer rocks from 2J to 4 inches. The sizes do 
 not refer to the actual dimensions of the stone, but to the size of the 
 hole in the screen; thus IJ-inch stone is that which is retained by a 
 1^-inch opening and passes through a 2- or 2J-inch opening. 
 
 Thickness of the Broken Stone. The thickness of the broken 
 stone is determined for the given conditions by the formula pre- 
 viously stated, and ranges from 4 to 16 inches. Where the thickness 
 exceeds 6 inches, the excess may be composed of sand, gravel, field- 
 stone, ledge rock, or broken stone, as previously stated in the dis- 
 cussion on foundations; the choice depending on availability and 
 cost. For use in the base all are equally effective. 
 
 Spreading the Stone. The method employed for laying the 
 covering varies with the thickness. When the finished thickness is 
 4 inches all the stone to be used is laid in one course. When the 
 finished thickness exceeds 4 inches the stone is laid in two or more 
 courses; the top or wearing course, being composed of the best and 
 most expensive stone, is made the least thickness compatible with 
 good construction and maintenance. To provide for the shrinkage 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 93 
 
 of the stone under the roller, the depth of the courses of loose stone 
 should exceed the finished depth by from 25 to 30 per cent. 
 
 The stone is hauled upon the roadbed in vehicles of various 
 types provided with broad-tired wheels. In some types of vehicle 
 it is spread in layers as the vehicle is drawn along the roadbed ; with 
 others it is dumped in heaps and spread by hand with forks and 
 brought to an even surface by raking, Fig. 62. 
 
 Compacting the Broken Stone. The stone is compacted by 
 rolling with heavy rollers drawn by horses or propelled by steam or 
 other power, Fig. 63. The steam roller is more effective than horse- 
 
 Fig. 62. View Showing Spreading of Lower Course of Macadam Road 
 Courtesy of United States Department of Agriculture 
 
 drawn rollers. The usual weights of steam rollers are 5, 10, and 15 
 tons; the 10-ton being the one generally used, although the weight 
 of the roller should be selected in accordance with the bearing power 
 of the natural soil. A roller having excessive weight may cause 
 injury to the roadbed, by rolling it into undulations that will permit 
 water to collect and consequently cause damage. A roadbed which 
 will stand a heavy roller in dry weather may be injured by it during 
 wet weather. For a weak roadbed it is well to use two rollers, one of 
 light weight to form a crust and a narrow, heavy roller to compact it. 
 
94 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 The roller should commence at one edge or border of the road- 
 way, and move along that edge until within about 25 feet of one 
 end of the spread stone; it then should cross over to the other edge 
 and proceed along this edge to the beginning, crossing over and 
 overlapping the strips previously rolled until the center of the road 
 is reached. The rolling is continued in this manner until the stones 
 cease to creep in front or sink under the roller. If, during the first 
 passages of the roller, low spots appear, they should be filled to 
 grade with stone of the same size as is in the course being rolled. 
 
 Fig. 63. Compacting Broken Stone by Steam Roller 
 Courtesy of United States Department of Agriculture 
 
 After about two passages of the roller, the binder, consisting of 
 the screenings from the stone being used for the course, is spread in 
 a thin layer over the surface of the partly compacted stone and 
 sprinkled with water, which washes it into the voids in the stone; 
 the rolling then is continued, Fig. 64. The operation of applying 
 the binder, sprinkling, and rolling is repeated until a wave of water 
 and screenings rises in front of the roller. Each course is treated 
 and rolled in the same manner. If the screenings from the rock 
 that is being used are not suitable for binding, screenings from other 
 rock, clay, sand, or loam are substituted. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 95 
 
 An excess of binder and water will shorten the time required to 
 consolidate the stone and produce the appearance of a good piece of 
 work, but under traffic it will wear unevenly and go to pieces quickly. 
 
 Suppression of Dust on Macadam and Telford Roads. Since 
 the introduction of mechanically , propelled vehicles, broken-stone 
 roads constructed according to the principles of Telford and McAdam, 
 have proven inadequate to the demands of the changed traffic. 
 
 The adhesion between the particles of stone is insufficient to 
 react against the propulsive force exerted by the driving wheels, 
 
 Fig. 64. Rolling and Sprinkling Second Course of Macadam Road to Complete 
 
 Binding Process 
 Courtesy of United States Department of Agriculture 
 
 hence the stones are loosened, and although the rubber tires with 
 which the motor vehicles are equipped produce little dust by attri- 
 tion or wearing away, the vehicle moving at high speed creates a 
 partial vacuum. The current of air which then rushes in to re-estab- 
 lish the equilibrium picks up the small particles of stone displaced 
 and loosened by the thrust of the driving wheels and distributes 
 them in the form of dust, which is very disagreeable to other users 
 of the road and residents along it. The large stones that are loosened 
 
96 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 are thrown about and ground upon one another and thus increase 
 the amount of fine material ready to be scattered as dust. 
 
 The frequent repetition of these actions causes the pavement 
 to pit and. disintegrate. The destructive effect is intensified, the 
 greater the speed, and where the irregularities of the surfaces are 
 such as to cause the wheels to leave it, there is produced a bounding 
 motion that is continued for some distance and is particularly dis- 
 astrous. Shearing of the road fabric is very severe on steep grades 
 and curves due to the slipping of the driving wheels when the pro- 
 pulsive force is greater than the adhesion between the tire and the 
 road surface. The damage arising from this is more extensive 
 during wet weather and is intensified when the wheels are equipped 
 with bars, chains, studs, and other anti-skidding devices. 
 
 The formation bf dust and mud cannot be prevented absolutely, 
 because all materials, by attrition and the disintegrating action of 
 the elements, yield dust when dry and mud when wet. If the sur- 
 face of a water-bound macadam road could be maintained in a 
 moist condition, there would be no dust, but moistening with water 
 even in cities, towns, and villages is expensive, and in rural districts 
 the cost is prohibitive and the practice would be impossible, owing 
 to the absence of water available for the purpose. Hence in dealing 
 with existing road surfaces a remedy has been sought in more fre- 
 quent cleansing and in the use of some substitute for water which 
 would be cheap, effective, lasting, and easily applied. To meet this 
 demand several "dust-laying" compositions have been placed on 
 the market, and experiments have been made with some of these, 
 but it has been demonstrated clearly that, with but few exceptions, 
 they have a very temporary effect, and their application must be 
 frequent and thorough. 
 
 Under the head of exceptions, that is, of the more or less 
 permanent methods, are included the following: (1) the cementing 
 of the surface stone by a bituminous cement or binder. When 
 the binder is applied by the penetration method, the surface is 
 described by the general term " bituminous-macadam"; and when it is 
 desired to indicate the kind of binder, the descriptive names, "asphalt- 
 macadam", "tar-macadam", etc., are used. When the binder is 
 applied by the mixing method, the construction is called "bitumi- 
 nous-concrete", or specifically designated by the trade or patented 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 97 
 
 name as, "bitulithic", "warrenite", "amiesite", "filbertine", "rock- 
 asphalt", etc.; (2) binding the stone with hydraulic cement, the 
 surface so formed being called "concrete-macadam", or "concrete 
 pavement". These will be discussed later under their respective 
 headings. 
 
 Turning to the details of the various temporary methods, we 
 find the following : 
 
 (1) Fresh Water. This is the simplest remedy, but not always 
 the most practicable nor the cheapest. 
 
 (2) Sea Water. This is a simple remedy but available only on 
 the seacoast. The salts contained in sea water are highly anti- 
 septic and deliquescent; a light sprinkling will suppress the dust for 
 several hours. Its use, however, is objected to for the reason that 
 it injures the varnish and running gear of vehicles, corrodes cast- 
 iron street fittings, and when the road surface on which it has been 
 used has dried the dust then produced, containing salt, injures food 
 and other goods exposed to it. Moreover, after a few weeks' use 
 the dust is converted into a pasty mud that adheres to the wheels 
 and causes the surface of the road to be "picked up". 
 
 (3) Deliquescent Salts. The chief advantage of these salts is 
 that their effect is more lasting than that of water. The salt used 
 most extensively is calcium chloride obtained as a by-product in the 
 manufacture of soda by the ammonia process. The salt may be 
 applied either in solution or in the dry form. It takes up water 
 rapidly and proves very efficient where the atmospheric moisture is 
 sufficient to feed the salt. Glutrin, the commercial name for the 
 waste sulphite liquor obtained in the manufacture of paper from 
 wood pulp by the sulphite process, reduces the formation of dust, 
 but the treatment must be repeated frequently. Waste molasses 
 or "black strap" from sugar refineries mixed with milk of lime 
 possesses good dust-suppressing qualities. 
 
 (4) Coal- Tar Coating. Refined coal tar applied either hot or 
 cold in the form of a spray minimizes the production of dust, renders 
 the surface waterproof, and reduces wear. The success attending 
 its use depends upon the quality of the tar, the state of the weather, 
 which must be clear and dry, the condition of the road surface, 
 which must be dry and free from dust and dirt, and, in the case of 
 hot application, that the tar is not overheated. 
 
98 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 (5) Solutions of Coal Tar and Petroleum. Several patented 
 preparations of coal tar are on the market. The principle of all is 
 practically the same, namely, the solution of the tar or oil in water 
 by a volatile agent, which on evaporation leaves a more or less 
 insoluble coating on the road surface. The more favorably known 
 of these preparations are "tarvia" and "westrumite". 
 
 (6) Crude Petroleum and Residuum Oil. Crude petroleum 
 containing a large percentage of asphalt gives the best results. 
 Petroleum having paraffin and naphtha as a base refuses to bind, 
 and produces a greasy slime. The residuum oils obtained in the 
 distillation of petroleum having asphaltum for a base have yielded 
 good results in many cases. 
 
 Two methods are followed in applying the oil: (a) The sur- 
 face of the road to be oiled is prepared by removing the dust with 
 hand or power brooms. The oil, in the cold method, is applied by 
 specially designed sprinkling wagons, at the rate of from one-third 
 to one-half gallon per square yard. After being applied the oil is 
 covered with sand or stone screenings and may or may not be 
 rolled. The oil is applied once or twice a year according to whether 
 the traffic is light or heavy. The surface of the road must be dry 
 when the oil is applied. 
 
 (b) The oil is sprinkled over the surface and mixed with the 
 dust. If the oil is merely sprinkled, the mixture of dust and oil 
 made by the action of the traffic will become very sticky and will be 
 removed in spots by adhering to the wheels. For the purpose of 
 facilitating the handling and of securing a deeper penetration 
 than is possible with cold oil, the oil is heated to a temperature of 
 about 140 Fahrenheit and applied in the same manner as the 
 cold oil. 
 
 (7) Oil Tar and Creosote. Oil tar is the residual liquid from 
 the manufacture of carbureted water gas and oil gas. The tar used 
 for road purposes is obtained by distilling the original tarry liquid to 
 remove the light oil, naphthalene, and creosote. Various grades of 
 tar are produced according to the temperature at which the dis- 
 tillation is stopped. The higher the temperature of distillation, the 
 harder and more brittle the tar. 
 
 The oil tar either alone or mixed with creosote is applied in the 
 same manner as coal tar. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 99 
 
 Bituminous=Macadam 
 
 Features of Bituminous=Macadam. A bituminous-macadam 
 wearing surface differs from the previously described water-bound 
 broken-stone surface only in the kind of binder and the quality 
 of the stone. The bituminous binder is prepared from asphalt, 
 asphaltic oils, refined water-gas tars, refined coal tars, and com- 
 binations of refined tars and asphalts. 
 
 The bituminous binders adhere to comparatively porous and 
 relatively soft stone, such as limestone, better than to the hard 
 stones, such as trap and granite. Consequently, the stone used 
 with the bituminous binders may be inferior in hardness and binding 
 quality to that required for water-bound macadam. 
 
 Methods of Construction. The essentials necessary to the 
 successful construction of a bituminous covering are: (1) the exclu- 
 sion of both subsoil and surface water from the foundation; (2) a 
 solid unyielding foundation; (3) a stone of suitable quality and 
 size; (4) that the stone shall be entirely free from dust, otherwise 
 the dust will interpose a thin film between the stone and the bitu- 
 minous binder and prevent the latter from adhering to the stone; 
 (5) if the stone is to be used hot, that it shall not be overheated; 
 and if is to be used cold, that it shall be dry, for if wet or damp, 
 the bituminous material will not adhere to it; (6) that the bituminous 
 cement shall be of suitable quality; free from water, for which the 
 stone has a greater affinity than for bitumen, and would thus pre- 
 vent adhesion; free from ammoniacal liquor, which is apt to saponify 
 some of the oily constitutents and thus render them capable of 
 combining with water and therefore apt to be washed out; free 
 from an excess of light oils and naphtha, which act as diluents 
 and volatilize on the surface of the road, forming a skin that is 
 not durable; free from an excess of free carbon, because it has no 
 binding value and is liable to be converted into dust and mud. 
 
 Two general methods with various modifications in the minor 
 details are employed for applying the bituminous binder to form 
 the wearing surface, viz, the penetration method, and the mixing 
 method. 
 
 Penetration Method. In this method, the stone is spread and 
 packed slightly by rolling. The bituminous binder is then applied 
 by one of the following ways: by hand from pouring pots; by a 
 
100 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 nozzle leading from a tank cart; or by a mechanical distributor using 
 air pressure to discharge the material through nozzles that spread 
 it in a finely divided stream or spray, Fig. 65. The binder is heated, 
 usually by steam from the roller, but when hand pots are used, it 
 is heated in kettles over fires. The quantity applied is about If 
 gallons per square yard. After the binder is distributed, it is covered 
 
 with a light coating of stone 
 dust, sand, or gravel, and the 
 rolling is continued. In some 
 cases, after the rolling is com- 
 pleted, another application of 
 the binder is made at the rate 
 of about one-half gallon per 
 square yard; this is called a 
 "paint coat" and is covered 
 with a light sprinkling of stone 
 screenings. 
 
 Mixing Method. In this 
 method the stone to be used 
 for the wearing surface, vary- 
 ing in size from J to 1J 
 inches, is cleaned and dried, 
 then mixed with a sufficient 
 quantity of the binder to coat 
 all the stones thoroughly. 
 The mixing is performed by 
 manual labor on a mixing 
 board, Fig. 66, or by raking 
 the stones through a bath of 
 liquid binder, or by passing 
 through a mechanical mixing 
 machine, Fig. 67. The coated stones are spread upon the foundation 
 in a layer having a thickness of about 3 inches and are covered 
 with a light coating of stone screenings free from dust; then are 
 compacted by rolling, Fig. 68. Wherever the binder flushes to 
 the surface it is covered with screenings and rolled. When the 
 rolling is completed, the surplus screenings are swept from the 
 surface. The cleaned surface then is covered with a coat of the 
 
 Fig. 65. Spreading Bituminous Binder by Pressure 
 
 Nozzle, Penetration Method 
 
 Courtesy of Barrett Manufacturing Company, 
 
 New York City 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 101 
 
 Fig. 66. Hand Method of Mixing Stone and Binder 
 Courtesy of Barrett Manufacturing Company, New York City 
 
 Fig. 67. Machine Method of Mixing Stone and Binder 
 Courtesy of Barrett Manufacturing Company, New York City 
 
 Fig. 68. Rolling Bituminous Macadam Road Surface 
 Courtesy of Barrett Manufacturing Company, New 'York City 
 
102 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 binder called a "seal coat", for the purpose of insuring the water- 
 proofing and complete filling of the voids, Fig. 69. For this coat, 
 about one-half gallon of binder is used per square yard of surface. 
 Screenings again are spread and may or may not be rolled. 
 
 Advantages and Disadvantages of the Penetration Method. The 
 advantage of the penetration method is the ease and rapidity with 
 which it can be carried out, and the low cost for equipment and labor. 
 
 The disadvantages of the penetration method are: (1) the 
 difficulty of obtaining an absolutely uniform distribution of the binder, 
 thus producing "lean" and "fat" spots that will prove defective under 
 traffic; (2) it is wasteful, in that it is necessary to use more binder 
 than actually is required to coat the stones and bind them together; 
 
 7T\ 
 
 Fig. 69. Spraying Seal Coat by Auto Truck, One-Half Gallon to the Yard 
 Courtesy of Barrett Manufacturing Company, New York City 
 
 (3) it is difficult and sometimes impossible to use a binder of suffi- 
 cient original consistency to produce a satisfactory bond, owing to 
 the bitumen setting too rapidly when applied to cold stone. 
 
 Advantages and Disadvantages of the Mixing Method. The 
 advantages of the mixing method are : (1) the producing of a uniform 
 fabric in which the cement is distributed uniformly and cements 
 each individual stone; (2) that construction can be carried on in 
 colder weather than is permissible with the penetration method. 
 If hot stone is used, a bitumen can be employed of such original 
 consistency as is required to sustain the traffic satisfactorily. 
 
 The disadvantage of the mixing method is the greater cost, 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 103 
 
 due (1) to the increased labor, and (2) to the more elaborate equip- 
 ment and apparatus required. 
 
 Bitulithic. Bitulithic is composed of stone, ranging in size from 
 2 inches to ^iU of an inch, and dust, which are dried, heated, 
 and mixed in predetermined proportions, so as to reduce the voids 
 to about 10 per cent, and cemented by a hot bituminous cement 
 manufactured from either coal tar, asphalt, or a combination of 
 both. The cement is added in sufficient quantity not only to coat 
 every particle and to fill all of the remaining voids but with enough 
 surplus to result in a rubbery and slightly flexible condition of the 
 mixture after compression. 
 
 The mixture is spread, while hot, to such depth as will give 
 a thickness of 2 inches after compressing with a 10-ton roller. 
 After rolling, a composition coating called a "flush coat" is spread 
 over the surface; this being covered while sticky with hot stone 
 chips which are rolled until cool. The purpose of the stone chips 
 is to form a gritty surface to prevent slipping. 
 
 Amiesite. Amiesite is a patented preparation of crushed stone 
 or gravel, coated w r ith an asphaltic cement. It is laid in two courses 
 and a surface finish. The first course, -composed of stone ranging 
 from \ inch to \\ inches, is spread to a depth of 3 inches, blocks 
 or strips of wood being used to insure uniformity of depth, then 
 rolled once. The second course is composed of stone \ inch and 
 less, spread 1 inch deep, then rolled. The surface finish consists 
 of screenings or sand, used in sufficient quantity to fill the voids. 
 
 Rock Asphalt. The rock asphalt most used in the United 
 States is a sandstone containing from 7 to 10 per cent of asphalt. 
 It is prepared for use by pulverizing and is used either hot or cold. 
 It is spread upon the surface of the stone to a depth of about \\ 
 inches and rolled with a steam roller; the rolling is repeated daily for 
 several days, or until the asphalt becomes hard. 
 
 Definitions of Bituminous Materials. The most recently 
 adopted definitions of the bituminous materials employed in road 
 construction are: 
 
 Native Bitumen. Native bitumen is a mixture of native or 
 pyrogenous hydrocarbons and their non-metallic derivatives, which 
 may be gases, liquids, viscous liquids, or solids and which are soluble 
 in carbon disulphide. 
 
104 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Artificial Bitumen. Artificial bitumen is produced by the 
 destructive distillation of pyrobitumens and other substances of 
 an organic nature; the bitumens so produced are commonly known 
 as tars, the word tar being compounded with the name of the material 
 which has been subjected to the process of destructive distillation, 
 thus designating its origin, as, coal tar, oil tar, etc. 
 
 Bituminous. Bituminous refers to that which contains bitumen 
 or constitutes a source of bitumen. 
 
 Emulsions. Emulsions are oily substances made mixable with 
 water through the action of a saponifying agent or soap. 
 
 Fixed Carbon. Fixed carbon is the organic matter of the 
 residual coke obtained upon burning hydrocarbon products in a 
 covered vessel in the absence of free oxygen. 
 
 Fluxes. Fluxes are fluid oils and tars which are incorporated 
 with asphalt and semi-solid or solid oil and tar residuums for the 
 purpose of reducing or softening their consistency. 
 
 Residuums, Residual Petroleum, or Residual Oils. These are 
 heavy viscous residues produced by the evaporation or distillation 
 of crude petroleums until at least all of the burning oils have been 
 removed. 
 
 Bituminous Cement. The bituminous cements or binders 
 are prepared from (1) coal-, oil-, and water-gas tars; (2) asphaltic 
 petroleums; (3) asphalt; and (4) combinations of asphalt and the 
 residues of distillation from asphaltic petroleums. 
 
 Coal- Tar Binder. Coal-tar binder is the residue obtained by 
 the distillation of the crude tar produced in the manufacture of 
 illuminating gas and the manufacture of coke for metallurgical 
 purposes; the required consistency is obtained by removing part 
 or all of the contained oils. Owing to the difference in the tem- 
 peratures employed in the two producing processes, the constituents 
 of the tar, while identical in their characteristics, differ in their 
 amount; the most marked difference being in the free carbon con- 
 tent, of which coke-oven tar has the least. 
 
 Oil-Gas Tar. Oil-gas tar is produced in the manufacture of 
 gas from oil. The tarry residue is rather varied in character and 
 is prepared for use by distillation; it usually contains a large amount 
 of free carbon. 
 
 Water-Gas Tar. Water-gas tar is produced in the manufac- 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 105 
 
 ture of carbureted water gas for illuminating purposes and results 
 from the petroleum product employed for carbureting. It is a 
 thin oily liquid containing a large percentage of water. It is pre- 
 pared for road use by mechanical dehydration and distillation. 
 It has a strong gassy odor when applied to the road, but this dis- 
 appears in a few days. 
 
 Asphaltic Petroleums. Asphaltic petroleums are native petro- 
 leums which yield asphalts upon reduction. They are used in the 
 crude state, or after the illuminating and other oil constituents 
 have been removed by cracking or blowing. 
 
 Asphalt. Asphalt is the name by which the native semi-solid 
 and solid bitumen is known. Asphalt is the most permanent type 
 of binder and has been used for many years in the construction of 
 sheet-asphalt pavements. The semi-solid or tarry varieties are 
 called "malthas" and are the ones generally employed as a binder 
 for broken-stone roads; the solid variety is used almost exclusively 
 for street pavements. Rock asphalt or bituminous rock is the name 
 given to a great variety of sandstone rocks more or less saturated 
 or cemented by maltha or hard asphalt. In referring to rock asphalts 
 it is customary to add the name of the locality where they are found, 
 as "Kentucky rock asphalt", "Italian rock asphalt", etc. The 
 semi-solid varieties are used in the natural state or after the water 
 and volatile hydrocarbons have been removed by heating. The 
 hard varieties are prepared by softening with a suitable flux. 
 
 Combinations of Asphalt and Distillation Residues. Com- 
 binations of asphalt and the residue from the distillation of tars 
 and petroleums are made by adding either a refined maltha or a 
 pulverized solid asphalt; the mixing being accomplished by the 
 injection of compressed air through suitably formed nozzles. 
 
 Tests for Bituminous Materials. The bituminous materials 
 are subjected to certain tests for the. purpose of ascertaining their 
 chemical and physical properties. The results of the tests are 
 used in specifications to secure the furnishing of the desired quality 
 of material and to control the processes of manufacture; also to 
 form a record by which the behavior of the materials under similar 
 and dissimilar service conditions can be compared. The complex 
 character of the materials requires a suitably equipped laboratory 
 for the application of the tests. 
 
106 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 The tests are determinations of (1) amount of water contained; 
 
 (2) materials soluble in water; (3) homogeneity at a temperature 
 of 77 Fahrenheit; (4) specific gravity; (5) consistency or vis- 
 cosity measured by a standard penetration machine; (6) ductility, 
 or the distance the material can be drawn out before breaking; 
 (7) toughness, or resistance to fracture under blows in an impact 
 machine ; (8) melting or softening point, measured by a thermometer 
 while the temperature is raised through a water or oil bath; (9) 
 distillation the products yielded at different temperatures during 
 continuous distillation in a suitable flask or retort are caught and 
 weighed; (10) amount of free carbon a sample is dissolved in carbon 
 bisulphide, the solution filtered, and the insoluble residue weighed; 
 
 (11) amount of fixed carbon a sample is placed in a platinum 
 crucible and heated until the emission of flame and smoke ceases, 
 then is allowed to cool and the residue is weighed; and the difference 
 between the weight of the sample and the residue is the fixed carbon; 
 
 (12) paraffine the presence of paraffine is determined by treating 
 a sample with absolute ether, freezing the mixture, filtering the 
 precipitate, evaporating and weighing the residue; (13) amount 
 of bitumen contained found by weighing a sample of the dried 
 material, by adding carbon bisulphide to dissolve the bitumen, 
 and by drying and weighing the residue after the extraction is 
 completed. The loss is the amount of bitumen soluble in 
 carbon bisulphide. A sample also is treated with naphtha and 
 the character of the residue is noted as to whether it is sticky 
 or oily. 
 
 Concrete Pavements 
 
 Construction Methods. Several methods with many varia- 
 tions are employed for the construction of concrete pavements. 
 The principal ones are: (1) grouting method, the construction 
 being commonly called "concrete macadam"; (2) mixing method; 
 
 (3) block or cube method. 
 
 Grouting Method. In this method the stone is spread upon 
 the foundation and lightly rolled, after which a mixture of one 
 part of cement and three parts of sand in the dry state is spread over 
 the stone and swept into the interstices by brooms, then sprinkled 
 with water and rolled; more cement and sand are spread, sprinkled, 
 and rolled; the operation is repeated until the interstices are filled. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 107 
 
 A variation of this method, known as the Hassam paving, is made " 
 by spreading the stone, ranging in size from 1| inches to 2J inches, 
 and rolling it to a thickness of 4 inches, then filling the interstices 
 with a grout composed of one part cement and three parts of sand 
 mixed with water in a mixing machine, from which it flows over 
 the surface, the machines being drawn along the roadway for this 
 purpose; rolling is proceeded with at the same time and sufficient 
 grout is applied to fill the interstices. On the foundation so prepared 
 a wearing surface is formed; the stone is spread in the same manner 
 as in the first course; the grout, composed of one part cement and 
 two parts sand, mixed with sufficient water to make it very fluid, is 
 applied by flowing over the surface of the compacted stone. The 
 surface is finished by applying a thick grout composed of one part 
 each cement, sand, and pea-sized trap rock. 
 
 Mixing Method. In this method the ingredients are com- 
 bined into concrete by either hand or machine mixing; the con- 
 crete is deposited in place in one or two courses, the former being 
 called "one-course" pavement and the latter "two-course" pave- 
 ment. In the one-course method, the concrete mixed in the pro- 
 portions of one part cement, one and one-half parts sand, and three 
 parts stone is spread upon the prepared natural soil foundation 
 and tamped to a thickness of about 6 inches. 
 
 In the two-course work the concrete mixed in the proportions 
 of one part cement, two and one-half parts sand, and five parts 
 stone is spread upon the prepared natural-soil foundation and com- 
 pacted by rolling or tamping to the required thickness. On its 
 surface, and before the cement has set, the wearing surface of about 
 2 inches in thickness is placed and tamped to the required contour. 
 The mixtures used for the wearing surface vary, being composed 
 of sand and cement, or of sand, cement, and small broken stone. 
 The wearing surface of the Blome pavement is composed of one 
 part cement and one and one-half parts of aggregate, which is 
 made up of 50 per cent J-inch, 30 per cent J-inch, and 20 per cent 
 -tV-inch granite screenings. The surface is formed into 4J-inch 
 by 9-inch blocks by cutting grooves \ inch wide and \ inch deep 
 by means of special tools. 
 
 Materials. The materials used in the construction of concrete 
 pavements should be selected with care. The stone should be a 
 
108 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 hard tough rock, free from dust and dirt, and graded so as to reduce 
 voids to the minimum. The sand should be free from loam, clay, 
 vegetable and organic matter, and should grade from coarse to 
 fine. The cement should be of a quality to meet the standard 
 tests. The water should be clean and free from organic matter, 
 alkalies, and acids. Rapid drying of the concrete should be pre- 
 vented by covering it with a canvas which is kept moistened with 
 water for several hours; after its removal the surface should be 
 covered with sand or earth which is to be kept moist for a period 
 of two weeks. Improperly mixed or constructed concrete pave- 
 ment will wear unevenly, crack, and rapidly become very defective. 
 
 Expansion Joints. To provide for the expansion and con- 
 traction of the concrete under changes of temperature, expansion 
 joints are formed at intervals ranging from 15 to 50 feet. The 
 edges of the joints are protected from injury by angle irons, and 
 the space between them, about J inch, is filled with a bituminous 
 cement which extends the full depth of the concrete. When the 
 concrete is laid between curbs longitudinal joints from f inch to 
 IJ inches wide, filled with bituminous cement, are formed along 
 the curb. 
 
 Reinforced-Concrete Pavement. Concrete pavements rein- 
 forced with steel in the form of woven-wire, Fig. 70, expanded metal, 
 and round bars are constructed in two courses, the reinforcement 
 being placed between the foundation course and the wearing surface. 
 
 Concrete with Bituminous Surface. In this type the surface 
 of the concrete pavement, constructed by either the grouting or 
 mixing method, is covered with a bituminous cement made from 
 either asphalt, coal tar, or a mixture of both. 
 
 Block or Cube Pavement. In' this type of pavement, blocks 
 or cubes of concrete are molded in a machine or cast in molds. 
 The blocks are stacked and allowed to season for three months, 
 during which time they are wet twice a day. They are laid by 
 hand on a sand cushion spread upon the foundation, then are brought 
 to a firm bearing and uniform surface by rolling with a light roller. 
 The surface is covered with a layer of sand or sandy loam which 
 is broomed and flushed by water into the joints and the rolling is 
 repeated; after which the surface is covered with a layer of sand, 
 and the traffic then admitted. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 109 
 
 A variation from the methods described is made in the patented 
 pavement "rocmac". This is composed of broken stone cemented 
 by silicate of lime, obtained by mixing powdered carbonate of lime 
 with a solution of silicate of soda and sugar. The silicate of lime 
 mortar is spread upon the foundation to a depth of about 2 inches, 
 over which the broken stone is distributed to such a depth as will 
 give, when compacted, a depth of about 4 inches. It is rolled and 
 sprinkled with water until the mortar flushes to the surface, and 
 
 Fig. 70. Laying Reinforced Concrete Road. Woven Wire Fabric in Foreground Ready 
 
 to Be Placed between Upper and Lower Coat 
 Courtesy of Municipal Engineering and Contracting Company, Chicago 
 
 then is covered with a layer of stone screenings and finally opened 
 to traffic. 
 
 MAINTENANCE AND IMPROVEMENT OF ROADS 
 
 Repair and Maintenance of Broken=Stone Roads. These 
 terms frequently but erroneously are used interchangeably. Repair 
 means the restoring of a surface so badly worn that it cannot be 
 maintained in good condition. A well-maintained road should not 
 require repairs for a considerable length of time. The maintenance 
 of a road is the keeping of it, as nearly as practicable, in the same 
 condition as it was when constructed. 
 
 Good maintenance comprises: (1) constant daily attention 
 to repair the ravages of traffic and the elements; (2) cleansing to 
 
110 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 remove the detritus caused by wear, the horse droppings, and 
 other refuse; and (3) application of water or other dust layer. 
 
 When the surface of a water-bound broken-stone road requires 
 to be renewed, it is loosened and broken up by scarifying, the new 
 stone spread, rolled, watered, and bound in the same manner as in 
 new construction; or the old surface is cleansed from dust and 
 other matter by sweeping and washing, and the new stone spread 
 upon it, compacted and finished as in new construction. 
 
 The resurfacing of water-bound roads with a bituminous con- 
 struction is becoming common. The methods employed are the 
 same as heretofore described under "bituminous macadam". 
 
 Systems of Maintenance. Several systems for maintaining 
 roads are in use, the one yielding the best results being that which 
 provides for the continuous employment of skilled workmen. The 
 men so employed become familiar with the peculiarities of the 
 sections in their charge and with the best way to deal with them. 
 Efficient maintenance requires that the surfaces be kept smooth 
 so that surface water may flow away rapidly" and that the injury 
 caused by traffic on uneven surfaces may be avoided; that incipient 
 ruts, hollows, and depressions be eliminated by cutting out the area 
 involved in the form of a square or rectangle and filling with new 
 material; that dust and horse droppings be removed; that loose 
 stones be removed; that gutters be clear so the rain water may be 
 removed quickly; that ditches and culverts be cleaned out in advance 
 of the spring and fall rains; that weeds and grass be removed from 
 the earth shoulders, and that these and the dust sweepings be not 
 left on the sides of the road to be redistributed, but be removed 
 immediately and disposed of in such manner as will not cause injury; 
 that bridges be examined and repaired at least twice a year. 
 
 Improvement of Existing Roads. The improvement of existing 
 roads may be divided into three branches: (1) rectification of align- 
 ment; (2) drainage; (3) improvement of the surface. 
 
 The first of these consists in the application of the principles 
 which have been laid down for the location, etc., of new roads and 
 will include straightening the course by eliminating unnecessary 
 curves and bends ; improving the grade either by avoiding or cutting 
 down hills and by embanking valleys; increasing the width where 
 necessary, and rendering it uniform throughout. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 111 
 
 The second, or drainage, consists in applying the principles laid 
 down for the drainage of new roads, and in constructing the works 
 necessary to give them effect. 
 
 The third, or improvement of the surface, consists in improving 
 the surface by any of the methods previously described and that 
 the funds available will permit. 
 
 Value of Improvement. The improvement of roads is chiefly an 
 economical question relating to the w T aste of effort and to the saving 
 of expenditure. Good roads reduce the resistance to locomotion, 
 and this means reduction of the effort required to move a given load. 
 Any effort costs something, and so the smallest effort costs the least, 
 and therefore the smoothest road saves the most money for every- 
 one who traverses it with a vehicle. 
 
 Cost of Improvement. Before undertaking any improvement 
 generally it is required to know the cost of the proposed improve- 
 ment and the benefits it will produce. In the improvement of roads 
 the amount of money that may be expended profitably for any 
 proposed improvement may be calculated with sufficient accuracy 
 by obtaining first the following data: (1) the quantity and quality 
 of the traffic using the road; (2) the cost of haulage; (3) plan and 
 profile of the road; and (4) character and cost of the proposed 
 improvements. From the data ascertain the total annual traffic and 
 the total annual cost of hauling it. Next, calculate the annual cost 
 of hauling the given tonnage over the road when improved. Then 
 the difference between the two costs will represent the annual inter- 
 est on the sum that may be expended in making the improvement. 
 For example, if the annual cost of haulage over the existing road is 
 $10,000 and the cost for hauling the same tonnage over the improved 
 road will be $7000, the difference, $3000, with money at 6 per cent 
 per annum, represents the sum of $50,000 that logically may be 
 appropriated to carry out the improvement. 
 
 Traffic Census. The direction, character, and amount of traffic 
 using a road is obtained by direct observation during different 
 seasons of the year. As a preliminary to observing the traffic it is 
 usual to determine the weight of the vehicles; this is done by weigh- 
 ing typical vehicles and by establishing an average weight for each 
 type. The traffic is classified according to the motive power as 
 horse-drawn vehicles and motor vehicles. Each of these classes is 
 
112 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE XI 
 
 Traffic Census 
 
 Average Hours per Day ; for 
 
 Taken at 
 By 
 
 .Days 
 
 
 EMPTY VEHICLES 
 
 LOADED VEHICLES 
 
 Nov. to 
 March 
 
 Aug. to 
 Oct. 
 
 Nov. to 
 March 
 
 Aug. to 
 Oct. 
 
 Pleasure 
 
 Horse < / T - , , 
 
 [Light 
 
 [ Commercial < Medium 
 (Heavy 
 
 
 
 
 
 fMotorcycles 
 Pleasure j Runabouts 
 [Touring cars 
 Motor 
 (Light 
 Commercial j Medium 
 ( Heavy 
 
 
 
 
 
 divided into pleasure and commercial traffic, the latter class being 
 subdivided into loaded and non-loaded vehicles. The number of 
 horses to a vehicle in horse-drawn traffic and the speed of motor 
 vehicles may be noted. A summary of data is suggested in Table XL 
 
 The observations are made from 6 a. m. to 6 p. m., during a period 
 of seven days each month, with occasional observations, from 6 p. m. 
 to 6 a. m. or for the entire 24 hours if the amount of traffic requires it. 
 
 The weight of the traffic is ascertained by multiplying the 
 number of each kind of vehicle by the average weight established 
 for that type. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 PART II 
 
 CITY STREETS AND HIGHWAYS 
 
 The first work requiring the skill of the engineer is the laying 
 out of town sites properly, especially with reference to the future 
 requirements of a large city, where any such possibility exists. 
 Few if any of our large cities were so planned. The same principles, 
 to a limited extent, are applicable to all towns or cities. The topog- 
 raphy of the site should be studied carefully, and the street lines 
 adapted to it. These lines should be laid out systematically, with a 
 view to convenience and comfort, and also with reference to econ- 
 omy of construction, future sanitary improvements, grades, and 
 drainage. 
 
 Arrangement of City Streets. Generally, the best method of 
 laying out streets is in straight lines, with frequent and regular inter- 
 secting streets, especially for the business parts of a city. When 
 there is some centrally located structure, such as a courthouse, city 
 hall, market, or other prominent building, it is very desirable to have 
 several diagonal streets leading thereto. In the residence portions 
 of cities, especially if on hilly ground, curves may replace straight 
 lines with advantage, by affording better grades at less cost of grad- 
 ing, and by improving property through avoiding heavy embank- 
 ments or cuttings. 
 
 Width of Streets. The width of streets should be proportioned 
 to the character of the traffic that will use them. No rule can be 
 laid down by which to determine the best width of streets; but it 
 may be said safely that a street which is likely to become a com- 
 mercial thoroughfare should have a width of not less than 120 feet 
 between the building lines the carriage-way 80 feet wide, and the 
 sidewalks each 20 feet wide. 
 
 In streets occupied entirely by residences a carriage-way 32 feet 
 wide will be ample, but the width between the building lines may be 
 
114 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 as great as desired. The sidewalks may be any amount over 10 feet 
 which fancy dictates. Whatever width is adopted for them, not 
 more of it than 8 feet need be paved, the remainder being occupied 
 with grass and trees. 
 
 Street Grades. The grades of city streets depend upon the 
 topography of the site. The necessity of avoiding deep cuttings or 
 high embankments which seriously would affect the value of adjoin- 
 ing property for building purposes, often demands steeper grades 
 than are permissible on country roads. Many cities have paved 
 streets on 20 per cent grades. In establishing grades through unim- 
 proved property, they usually may be laid with reference to securing 
 the most desirable percentage within a proper limit of cost. But 
 
 when improvements already 
 have been made and have been 
 located with reference to the 
 natural surface of the ground, 
 the matter of giving a desirable 
 grade without injury to adjoin- 
 ing property frequently is one 
 of extreme difficulty. In such 
 cases it becomes a question of 
 
 a 
 
 Fig. 71. Diagram Showing Arrangement of 
 Grades at Street Intersections 
 
 how far individual interests shall 
 be sacrificed to the general good. 
 There are, however, certain con- 
 ditions which it is important to 
 bear in mind: (1) That the 
 longitudinal crown level should be sustained uniformly from street 
 to street intersection, whenever practicable. (2) That the grade 
 should be sufficient to drain the surface. (3) That the crown levels 
 at all intersections should be extended transversely, to avoid forming 
 a depression at the junction. 
 
 A rrangements of Grades at Street Intersections . The best arrange- 
 ment for intersections of streets when either or both have much 
 inclination is a matter which requires careful consideration and 
 upon which much diversity of opinion exists. No hard or fast rule 
 can be laid down; each will require special adjustment. The best 
 and simplest method is to make level the rectangular space aaaaaaaa, 
 Fig. 71, with a rise of one-half inch in 10 feet from AAAA to B, 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 115 
 
 placing gulleys at AAAA and the catch basins at ccc. When this 
 method is not practicable, adopt such a grade (but one not exceeding 
 2J per cent) that the rectangle AAAA shall appear to be nearly 
 level; but to secure this it must have actually a considerable dip in 
 the direction of the slope of the street. If steep grades are con- 
 tinued across intersections, they introduce side slopes in the streets 
 thus crossed, which are troublesome, if not dangerous, to vehicles 
 turning the corners, especially the upper ones. Such intersections 
 
 W* 1 
 
 
 
 IlklU 
 
 M<y<L_ki 
 
 ^ ^.<?-? 
 
 >{p<3./d kj 
 
 1 *^ 1 
 
 I 1 
 
 ! 46 75^ 
 
 I 1 
 
 ^ ] (jO' 
 
 1 9^ ' ! 
 
 ( \50.3 95.96 |> 
 
 95.96 _/| 
 
 ,5^' 
 
 
 
 1Z 
 
 JZ' 
 
 ^' /" 
 
 s 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 N 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 t 
 
 ^ 5ft?' 
 
 
 5\- e 
 
 \\ll.90 31. IK 
 
 ; 
 
 50^ Vj 
 
 ' Q^ 
 
 
 1 | 
 
 M ~^ 
 
 
 tfi ! 
 t- A ! 
 
 fa. 72 
 
 r 
 
 Fig. 72. Diagram Showing Arrangement of Intersections for Steep Grades in 
 Duluth, Minnesota 
 
 are especially objectionable in rainy weather. The storm water 
 will fall to the lowest point, concentrating a large quantity of water 
 at two receiving basins, which, with a broken grade, could be divided 
 among four or more basins. 
 
 Fig. 72 shows the arrangement of intersections in steep grades 
 adapted for the streets of Duluth, Minnesota. From this it will be 
 seen that at these intersections the grades are flattened to 3 per 
 cent for the width of the roadway of the intersecting streets, and that 
 the grade of the curbs is flattened to 8 per cent for the width of the 
 
116 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 intersecting sidewalks. Grades of less amount on roadway or side- 
 walk are continuous. The elevation of block corners is found by 
 adding together the curb elevations at the faces of the block corners, 
 and 2J per cent of the sum of the widths of the two sidewalks at the 
 corner, and dividing the whole by two. This gives an elevation 
 equal to the average elevation of the curbs at the corners, plus an 
 average rise of 2J per cent across the width of the sidewalk. 
 
 "Accommodation summits" have to be introduced between 
 street intersections in two general cases: (1) in hilly localities, to 
 avoid excessive excavation; and (2) when the intersecting streets 
 are level or nearly so, for the purpose of obtaining the fall necessary 
 for surface drainage. 
 
 The elevation and location of such a summit may be calculated 
 as follows: Let A, Fig. 73, be the elevation of the highest corner; 
 
 Fig. 73. Diagrams for Calculating "Accommodation Summits" between 
 Street Intersections 
 
 B, the elevation of the lowest corner; D, the distance from corner 
 to corner; and R, the rate of the accommodation grade. The 
 elevation of the summit is equal to 
 
 DXR+A+B 
 
 The distance from A or B is found by subtracting the elevation of 
 either A or B from this quotient, and dividing the result by the rate 
 of grade. Or the summit may be located mechanically by specially 
 prepared scales. Prepare two scales divided to correspond to the 
 rate of grade; that is, if the rate of grade be 1 foot per 100 feet, then 
 one division of the scale should equal 100 feet on the map scale. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 117 
 
 These divisions may be subdivided into tenths. One scale should 
 read from right to left, and one from left to right. 
 
 To use the scales, place them on the map so that their figures 
 correspond with the corner elevations; then, as the scales read in 
 opposite directions, there is of course some point at which the oppo- 
 site readings will be the same. This point is the location of the 
 summit, and the figures read off the scale give its elevation. If the 
 difference in elevation of the corners is such as not to require an 
 intermediate summit for drainage, it will be apparent as soon as 
 the scales are placed in position. 
 
 When an accommodation summit is employed, it should be 
 formed by joining the two straight grade lines by a vertical curve, 
 as described in Part I. The curve should be used both in the crown 
 of the street and in the curb and footpath. 
 
 Where the grade is level between intersections, sufficient fall for 
 surface drainage may be secured without the aid of accommodation 
 summits, by arranging the grades as shown in Fig. 74. The curb is 
 
 Curb Level 
 
 _. ~ ' Bottom of Gutter , . 
 
 Fig. 74. Diagram Showing Arrangement of Grades to Avoid 
 "Accommodation Summits" 
 
 set level between the corners; a summit is formed in the gutter; and 
 receiving basins are placed at each corner. 
 
 Transverse Grade. In its transverse grade the street should be 
 level ; that is, the curbs on opposite sides should be at the same level, 
 
 Fig. 75. Street with Unequal Transverse Grade but with Level Street 
 
 and the street crown rise equally from each side to the center. But 
 in hillside streets this condition cannot be fulfilled always, and 
 opposite sides of the street may differ as much as 5 feet. In such 
 cases the engineer will have to use his discretion as to whether he 
 shall adopt a straight slope inclining to the lower side, thus draining 
 
118 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 the whole street by the lower gutter, or adopt the three-curb method 
 and sod the slope of the higher side. 
 
 In the improvement of old streets with the sides at different 
 levels, much difficulty will be met, especially where shade trees have 
 
 1 
 
 Fig. 76. Street with Unequal Transverse Grade Inclined so as to Drain by Lower Gutter 
 
 to be spared. In such cases, recognized methods have to be aban- 
 doned, and the engineer will have to adopt methods of overcoming 
 the difficulties in accordance with the conditions and necessities of 
 each particular case. Figs. 75, 76, and 77 illustrate several typical 
 
 Fig. 77. Street with Unequal Transverse Grade with Three Curbs and Higher Slope Sodded 
 
 arrangements in the cases of streets where the opposite sides are at 
 different levels. 
 
 Transverse Contour or Crown. The reason for crowning a 
 pavement i.e., making the center higher than the sides is to 
 provide for the rapid drainage of the surface. The most suitable 
 form for the crown is the parabolic curve, which may be started at 
 the curb line, or at the edge of the gutter adjoining the carriage-way, 
 
 Fig. 78. Method of Obtaining Transverse Contour or Crown of a Road 
 
 about one foot from the curb. Fig. 78 shows this form, which is 
 obtained by dividing the abscissa, or width from the center of the 
 street to the gutter, into ten equal parts, and by dropping perpen- 
 diculars at each of these divisions, the lengths of which are deter- 
 mined by multiplying the rise at the center by the square of the 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 119 
 
 TABLE XII 
 
 Rise of Pavement Center above Gutter for 
 Different Paving Materials 
 
 PAVING MATERIAL 
 
 PROPORTIONS OF RISE AT 
 CENTER TO WIDTH OF 
 CARRIAGE-WAY 
 
 Wood blocks 
 Stone blocks 
 Brick 
 Asphalt 
 
 1 : 100 
 1 :80 
 1 :80 
 1 :80 
 
 successive values of the abscissas. The amounts thus obtained can 
 be added to the rod readings; and the stakes, set at the proper dis- 
 tance across the street, with their tops at this level, will give the 
 required curve. 
 
 The amount of transverse rise, or the height of the center above 
 the gutters, varies with the different paving materials; smooth pave- 
 ments requiring the least, and rough ones and earth the greatest 
 rise. The rise is generally stated in a proportion of the width of the 
 carriage-way. The most suitable proportions are shown in Table XII. 
 
 Drainage of Streets. Sub-Foundation Drainage. The sub- 
 foundation drainage of streets cannot be effected by transverse 
 drains, because of their liability to disturbance by the introduction 
 of gas, water, and other pipes. 
 
 Longitudinal drains must be depended upon entirely; they may 
 be constructed of the same materials and in the same manner as road 
 drains. The number of these longitudinal drains must depend upon 
 the character of the soil. If the soil is moderately retentive, a single 
 row of tiles or a hollow invert placed under the sewer in the center of 
 the street generally will be sufficient; or two rows of tiles may be 
 employed, one placed outside each curb line. If, on the other hand, 
 the soil is exceedingly wet and the street very wide, four or more 
 lines may be employed. These drains may be permitted to dis- 
 charge into the sewers of the transverse streets. 
 
 Surface Drainage. The removal of water falling on the street 
 surface is provided for by collecting it in the gutters, from which it is 
 discharged into the sewers or other channels by means of catch basins 
 placed at all street intersections and dips in the street grades. 
 
 Gutters. The gutters must be of sufficient depth to retain all the 
 water which reaches them and prevent its overflowing on the foot- 
 
120 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 path. The depth should never be less than 6 inches, and very 
 rarely need be more than 10 inches. 
 
 Catch Basins. Catch basins are of various forms, usually circu- 
 lar or rectangular, built of brick masonry coated with a plaster of 
 Portland cement. Whichever form is adopted, they should fulfill 
 the following conditions : 
 
 (1) The inlet and outlet should have sufficient capacity to 
 receive and discharge all water reaching the basin. 
 
 (2) The basins should have sufficient capacity below the outlet 
 to retain all sand and road detritus, and prevent its being carried 
 into the sewer. 
 
 (3) They should be trapped so as to prevent the escape of 
 sewer gas. (This requirement frequently is omitted, to the detri- 
 ment of the health of the people.) 
 
 (4) They should be constructed so that the pit can be cleaned 
 out easily. 
 
 (5) The inlet should be constructed so as not to be choked 
 easily by leaves or debris. 
 
 (6) They must offer the least possible obstruction to traffic. 
 
 (7) The pipe connecting the basin to the sewer should be 
 freed easily of any obstruction. 
 
 The bottoms of the basins should be 6 or 8 feet below the street 
 level; and the water level in them should be from 3 to 4 feet lower 
 than the street surface, as a protection against freezing. 
 
 The capacity and number of basins will depend upon the area 
 of the surface which they drain. 
 
 In streets having level or light longitudinal grades, gullies may 
 be formed along the line of the gutter at such intervals as may be 
 found necessary. 
 
 Catch basins usually are placed at the curb line. In several 
 cities, the basin is placed in the center of the street, and connects to 
 inlets placed at the curb line. This reduces the cost of construction 
 and cleaning, and removes from the sidewalk the dirty operations of 
 cleaning the basins. 
 
 Catch basins and gully pits require cleaning out at frequent 
 intervals; otherwise the odor arising from the decomposing matter 
 contained in them will be very offensive. No rule can be laid down 
 for the intervals at which the cleaning should be done, but they must 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 121 
 
 be cleaned often enough to prevent the matter in them from putre- 
 fying. There is no uniformity of practice observed by cities in this 
 matter; in some, the cleaning is done but once a year; in others, after 
 every rain-storm; in still others, at intervals of three or four months; 
 while in a few cities the basins are cleaned out once a month. 
 
 FOUNDATIONS 
 
 The stability, permanence, and maintenance of any pavement 
 depend upon its foundation. If the foundation is weak, the surface 
 soon will settle unequally, forming depressions and ruts. With a 
 good foundation, the condition of the surface will depend upon 
 the material employed for the pavement and upon the manner of 
 laying it. 
 
 The essentials necessary to the forming of a good foundation are : 
 
 (1) The entire removal of all vegetable, perishable, and yielding 
 matter. It is of no use to lay good material on a bad substratum. 
 
 (2) The drainage of the subsoil wherever necessary. A per- 
 manent foundation can be secured only by keeping the subsoil dry; 
 for, where water is allowed to pass into and through it, its weak spots 
 will be discovered quickly, and settlement will take place. 
 
 (3) The thorough compacting of the natural soil by rolling with 
 a roller of proper weight and shape until there is formed a uniform 
 and unyielding surface. 
 
 (4) The placing on the natural soil so compacted of a thickness 
 of an impervious and incompressible material sufficient to cut off all 
 communication between the soil and the bottom of the pavement. 
 
 The character of the natural soil over which the roadway is to be 
 built has an important bearing upon the kind of foundation and the 
 manner of forming it; each class of soil will require its own special 
 treatment. Whatever its character, it must be brought to a dry and 
 tolerably hard condition by draining and rolling. Sand and gravels 
 which do not hold water, present no difficulty in securing a solid and 
 secure foundation; clays and soils retentive of water are the most 
 difficult. Clay should be excavated to a depth of at least 8 inches 
 below the bottom of the finished covering; and the space so excavated 
 should be filled in with sand, furnace slag, ashes, coal dust, oyster 
 shells, broken brick, or other materials which are not absorbent of 
 water excessively. A clay soil or one retaining water may be cheaply 
 
122 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 and effectually improved by laying cross drains with open joints at 
 intervals of 50 or 100 feet. These drains should be not less than 
 18 inches below the surface, and the trenches should be filled with 
 gravel. They should be 4 inches in internal diameter, and should 
 empty into longitudinal drains. 
 
 Sand and planks, gravel and broken stone successively have 
 been used to form the foundation for pavements; but, although emi- 
 nently useful materials, their application to this purpose always has 
 been a failure. Being inherently weak and possessing no cohesion, 
 the main reliance for both strength and wear must be placed upon 
 the surface covering. This covering usually (except in case of sheet 
 asphalt) composed of small units, with joints between them varying 
 from | inch to 1| inches posesses no elements of cohesion; and 
 under the blows and vibrations of traffic the independent units or 
 blocks will settle and be jarred loose. On account of their porous 
 nature, the subsoil quickly becomes saturated with urine and sur- 
 face waters, which percolate through the joints; winter frosts upheave 
 them; and the surface of the street becomes blistered and broken up 
 in dozens of places. 
 
 Concrete. As a foundation for all classes of pavement (broken 
 stone excepted), hydraulic-cement concrete is superior to any other. 
 When properly constituted and laid, it becomes a solid, coherent mass, 
 capable of bearing great weight without crushing. If it fail at all, it 
 must fail altogether. The concrete foundation is the most costly, 
 but this is balanced by its permanence and by the saving in the cost 
 of repairs to the pavement which it supports. It admits of access to 
 subterranean pipes with less injury to the neighboring pavement 
 than any other, for the concrete may be broken through at any 
 point without unsettling the foundation for a considerable distance 
 around it, as is the case with sand or other incoherent material; and 
 when the concrete is replaced and set, the covering may be reset at 
 its proper level, without the uncertain allowance for settlement 
 which is necessary in other cases. 
 
 Thickness of Course. The thickness of the concrete bed must 
 be proportioned by the engineer; it should be sufficient to provide 
 against breaking under transverse strain caused by the settlement of 
 the subsoil. On a well-drained soil, 6 inches will be found sufficient; 
 but in moist and clayey soils, 12 inches will not be excessive. On 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 123 
 
 such soils a layer of sand or gravel, spread and compacted before 
 placing the concrete, will be found very beneficial. 
 
 The proportions of the ingredients required for the manufacture 
 of concrete are ascertained by measuring the voids in each ingredient. 
 The strongest concrete will be produced when the volume of cement 
 is slightly in excess of that required to fill the voids in the sand, and 
 the volume of the combined cement and sand exceeds by about 10 
 per cent the volume of the voids in the stone or other material used 
 for the aggregate. Concrete frequently is mixed in the arbitrary 
 proportions of 1 part of cement, 3 parts of sand, and 6 parts of stone, 
 and although the results have been satisfactory, the proportions may 
 not be the most economical. 
 
 The ingredients of the concrete should be thoroughly mixed 
 with just sufficient water to produce a plastic mass, without any 
 surplus water running from it. After mixing, the concrete should 
 be deposited quickly in place, and brought to a uniform surface and 
 thickness by raking, then tamped until the mortar flushes to the 
 surface, then left undisturbed until set. The surface of concrete 
 laid during dry, warm, weather should be protected from the drying 
 action of the sun while the initial setting is in progress. This may 
 be accomplished by sprinkling with water as frequently as the rate 
 of evaporation demands or by covering it with a layer of damp 
 sand, straw, hay, or canvas. During freezing weather it is customary 
 to suspend the laying of concrete for the reason that alternate freez- 
 ing and thawing disintegrate it. 
 
 Measuring Voids in the Stone and Sand. The simplest method 
 for measuring the voids and one sufficiently accurate for the manu- 
 facture of concrete is the "pouring method' 5 in which a suitable 
 vessel of known capacity (usually one cubic foot) is filled with the 
 material, in which it is desired to ascertain the voids. Water then 
 is poured into the vessel until its surface is flush with the surface of 
 the material. The water is measured, and its amount is considered 
 to equal the total of the voids. 
 
 STONE=BLOCK PAVEMENTS 
 
 Stone blocks commonly are employed for pavements where 
 traffic is heavy. The material of which the blocks are made should 
 possess sufficient hardness to resist the abrasive action of traffic, and 
 
124 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE XIII 
 
 Specific Gravity, Weight, Resistance to Crushing, and Absorptive 
 Power of Stones 
 
 MATERIAL 
 
 SPECIFIC 
 GRAVITY 
 
 WEIGHT 
 (Ib. per 
 cu. ft.) 
 
 RESISTANCE 
 TO CRUSHING 
 (Ib. per sq. in.) 
 
 PERCENTAGE 
 OF WATER 
 ABSORBED 
 
 
 Min. 
 
 Max. 
 
 Min. 
 
 Max. 
 
 Min. 
 
 Max. 
 
 Min. 
 
 Max. 
 
 Granite 
 
 2.60 
 
 2.80 
 
 163 
 
 176 
 
 12,000 
 
 35,000 
 
 0.066 
 
 0.155 
 
 Trap 
 
 2.86 
 
 3.03 
 
 178 
 
 189 
 
 19,000 
 
 24,000 
 
 0.000 
 
 0.019 
 
 Sandstone 
 
 2.23 
 
 2.75 
 
 137 
 
 170 
 
 5,000 
 
 18,000 
 
 0.410 
 
 5.480 
 
 Limestone 
 
 1.90 
 
 2.75 
 
 118 
 
 175 
 
 7,000 
 
 20,000 
 
 0.200 
 
 5.000 
 
 Brick, paving 
 
 1.95 
 
 2.55 
 
 
 
 10,000 
 
 20,000 
 
 
 
 sufficient toughness to prevent them from being broken by the 
 impact of loaded wheels. The hardest stones will not give neces- 
 sarily the best results in the pavement, since a very hard stone 
 usually wears smooth and becomes slippery. The edges of the 
 block chip off, and the upper face becomes rounded, thus making the 
 pavement very rough. 
 
 The stone sometimes is tested to determine its strength, resist- 
 ance to abrasion, etc. ; but, as the conditions of use are quite different 
 from those under which it may be tested, such tests are seldom 
 satisfactory. However, examination of a stone as to its structure, 
 the closeness of its grain, its homogeneity, porosity, etc., may assist 
 in forming an idea of its value for use in a pavement. A low degree 
 of permeability usually indicates that the material will not be 
 greatly affected by frost. For data see Table XIII. 
 
 Materials. Granite. Granite is employed more extensively for 
 stone-block paving than is any other variety of stone; and because 
 of this fact, the term "granite paving" is generally used as being 
 synonymous with stone-block paving. The granite employed should 
 be of a tough, homogeneous nature. The hard, quartz granites 
 usually are brittle, and do not wear well under the blows of horses' 
 feet or the impact of vehicles; granite containing a high percentage 
 of feldspar will be injuriously affected by atmospheric changes; and 
 granite in which mica predominates will wear rapidly on account 
 of its laminated structure. Granite possesses the very important 
 property of splitting in three planes at right angles to one another, 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 125 
 
 so that paving blocks may readily be formed with nearly plane faces 
 and square corners. This property is called the rift or cleavage. 
 
 Sandstones. Sandstones of a close-grained, compact nature 
 often give very satisfactory results under heavy traffic. They are 
 less hard than granite, and wear more rapidly, but do not become 
 smooth and slippery. Sandstones are generally known in the 
 market by the name of the quarry or place where produced as 
 "Medina", "Berea", etc. 
 
 Trap Rock. Trap rock, while answering well the requirements 
 as to durability and resistance to wear, is objectionable on account 
 of its tendency to wear smooth and become slippery; it is also diffi- 
 cult to break into regular shapes. 
 
 Limestone. Limestone usually has not been successfully em- 
 ployed in the construction of block pavements, on account of its 
 lack of durability against atmospheric influences. The action of 
 frost commonly splits the blocks; and traffic shivers them, owing 
 to the lamination being vertical. 
 
 Cobblestone Pavement. Cobblestones bedded in sand possess 
 the merit of cheapness, and afford an excellent foothold for horses; 
 but the roughness of such pavements requires the expenditure of a 
 large amount of tractive energy to move a load over them. Aside 
 from this, cobblestones are entirely wanting in the essential requisites 
 of a good pavement. The stones being of irregular size, it is almost 
 impossible to form a bond or to hold them in place. Under the 
 action of the traffic and frost, the roadway soon becomes a mass of 
 loose stones. Moreover, cobblestone pavements are difficult to 
 keep clean, and very unpleasant to travel over. 
 
 Belgian=Block Pavement. Cobblestones were displaced by 
 pavements formed of small cubical blocks of stone. This type of 
 pavement was laid first in Brussels, thence imported to Paris, and 
 from there taken to the United States, where it has been widely 
 known as the "Belgian-block" pavement. It has been largely used 
 in New York City, Brooklyn, and neighboring towns, the material 
 being trap rock obtained from the Palisades on the Hudson River. 
 
 The stones, being of regular shape, remain in place better than 
 cobblestones; but the cubical form (usually 5 inches in each dimen- 
 sion) is a mistake. The foothold is bad; the stones wear round; and 
 the number of joints is so great that ruts and hollows are quickly 
 
126 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 formed. This pavement offers less resistance to traction than cobble- 
 stones, but it is almost equally rough and noisy. 
 
 Granite=Block Pavement. The Belgian block gradually has 
 been displaced by the introduction of rectangular blocks of granite. 
 Blocks of comparatively large dimensions were employed at first. 
 They were from 6 to 8 inches in width on the surface, from 10 to 20 
 inches in length, with a depth of 9 inches. They merely were placed 
 in rows on the subsoil, perfunctorily rammed, the joints filled with 
 sand, and the street thrown open to traffic. The unequal settlement 
 of the blocks, the insufficiency of the foothold, and the difficulty of 
 cleansing the street, led to the gradual development of the latest 
 type of stone-block pavement, which consists of narrow, rectangular 
 blocks of -granite, properly proportioned, laid on an unyielding and 
 impervious foundation, with the joints between the blocks filled 
 with an impermeable cement. 
 
 Experience has proved beyond doubt that this latter type of 
 pavement is the most enduring and economical for roadways sub- 
 jected to heavy and constant traffic. Its advantages are many, 
 while its defects are few. 
 
 Advantages. 
 
 (1) Adapted to all grades. 
 
 (2) Suits all classes of traffic. 
 
 (3) Exceedingly durable. 
 
 (4) Foothold, fair. 
 
 (5) Requires but little repair. 
 
 (6) Yields but little dust or mud. 
 
 (7) Facility for cleansing, fair. 
 Defects. 
 
 (1) Under certain conditions of the atmosphere, the surface of 
 the pavement becomes greasy and slippery. 
 
 (2) The incessant din and clatter occasioned by the movement 
 of traffic is an intolerable nuisance; it is claimed by many physicians 
 that the noise injuriously affects the nerves and health of persons 
 who are obliged to live or do business in the vicinity of streets 
 so paved. 
 
 (3) Horses constantly employed upon it soon suffer from the 
 continual jarring produced in their legs and hoofs, and quickly 
 wear out. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 127 
 
 (4) The discomfort of persons riding over the pavement is very 
 great, because of the continual jolting to which they are subjected. 
 
 (5) If stones of an unsuitable quality are used for example, 
 those that polish the surface quickly becomes slippery and exceed- 
 ingly unsafe for travel. 
 
 Blocks. Size and Shape. The proper size of blocks for paving 
 purposes has been a subject of much discussion, and a great variety 
 of forms and dimensions are to be found in all cities. 
 
 For stability, a certain proportion must exist between the depth, 
 the length, and the breadth. The depth must be such that when the 
 wheel of a loaded vehicle passes over one edge of the upper surface 
 of a block, the block will not tend to tip up. The resultant direction 
 of the pressure of the load and adjoining blocks always should tend 
 to depress the whole block vertically ; where this does not happen, the 
 maintenance of a uniform surface is impossible. To fulfill this re- 
 quirement, it is not necessary to make the block more than 6 inches 
 deep. 
 
 Width. The maximum width of blocks is controlled by the 
 size of horses' hoofs. To afford good foothold to horses drawing 
 heavy loads, it is necessary that the width of each block, measured 
 along the street, shall be the least possible consistent with stability. 
 If the width be great, a horse drawing a heavy load, attempting to find 
 a joint, slips back, and requires an exceptionally wide joint to pull 
 him up. It is therefore desirable that the width of a block shall not 
 exceed 3 inches; or that four blocks, taken at random and placed 
 side by side, shall not measure more than 14 inches. 
 
 Length. The length, measured across the street, must be 
 sufficient to break joints properly, for two or more joints in line lead 
 to the formation of grooves. For this purpose the length of the 
 block should be not less than 9 inches nor more than 12 inches. 
 
 Form. The blocks should be well squared, and must not taper 
 in any direction; sides and ends should be free from irregular pro- 
 jections. Blocks that taper from the surface downwards (wedge- 
 shaped) should not be permitted in the work; but if any are allowed, 
 they should be set with the widest side down. 
 
 Manner of Laying Blocks. The blocks should be laid in parallel 
 courses, with their longest side at right angles to the axis of the 
 street, and the longitudinal joints broken by a lap of at least 2 inches, 
 
128 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Quite 'r Formed of 3 Rows of 
 Blocks, Set Longitudinally 
 
 Figs. 79 and 80. The reason for this is to prevent the formation 
 of longitudinal ruts, which would happen if the blocks were laid 
 lengthwise. Laying blocks obliquely and "herringbone" fashion has 
 
 been tried in several 
 cities, with the idea that 
 the wear and formation 
 of ruts would be reduced 
 by having the vehicle 
 cross the blocks diago- 
 nally. The method has 
 failed to give satisfactory 
 
 Cross Section 
 
 Fig. 79. Section Showing Method of Laying Ston< 
 Block Pavement 
 
 results; the wear was 
 
 irregular and the foothold defective; the difficulty of construction 
 was increased by reason of labor required to form the triangular 
 joints; and the method was wasteful of material. 
 
 The gutters should 
 be formed by three or 
 more courses of block, 
 laid with their length 
 parallel to the curb. 
 
 At junctions or inter- 
 sections of streets, the 
 blocks should be laid 
 
 /.I- r 1 T v~s_y -I 
 
 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 pr-S '.'.'.' 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 ii iii 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 i i i _ 
 
 
 
 
 
 F"la ga ing 
 
 ii iii 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 i i i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i i i i i 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 i ' i ' , ' i ' , ' , 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 LiiiJaJrid 
 
 
 
 
 .5 
 
 
 Plan 
 
 Fig. 80. 
 
 Plan of Stone-Block Pavement Showing Method 
 of Laying Blocks 
 
 diagonally from the cen- 
 ter, as shown in Fig. 81. The reasons for this are: (1) to prevent 
 the traffic crossing the intersection from following the longitudinal 
 joints and thus forming depressions and ruts; (2) laid in this manner, 
 the blocks afford a more secure foothold for horses turning the 
 corners. The ends of the diagonal blocks where they abut against 
 the straight blocks, must be cut to the required bevel. 
 
 The blocks forming each course must be of the same depth, and 
 no deviation greater than J inch should be permitted. The blocks 
 should be assorted as they are delivered, and only those correspond- 
 ing in depth and width should be used in the same course. The 
 better method would be to gage the blocks at the quarry. This 
 would lessen the cost considerably; it would avoid also the incon- 
 venience to the public due to the stopping of travel because of the 
 rejection of defective material on the ground. This method undoubt- 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 '129 
 
 edly would be preferable to the contractor, who would be saved the 
 expense of handling unsatisfactory material; and it also would leave 
 the inspectors free to pay more attention to the manner in which the 
 work of paving is performed. 
 
 The accurate gaging of the blocks is a matter of much impor- 
 tance. If good work is to be executed, the blocks, when laid, must be 
 in parallel and even courses; and if the blocks are not gaged accurately 
 to one uniform size, the result will be a badly paved street, with the 
 courses running unevenly. The cost of assorting blocks into lots of 
 uniform width, after delivery on the street, is far in excess of any 
 
 Fig. 81. Diagram Showing Method of Laying Stone Blocks at 
 Intersection of Streets 
 
 additional price which would have to be paid for accurate gaging at 
 the quarry. 
 
 Foundation. The foundation of the blocks must be solid and 
 unyielding. A bed of hydraulic-cement concrete is the most suitable, 
 and its thickness must be regulated according to the traffic; the 
 thickness, however, should not be less than 4 inches, and need not be 
 more than 9 inches. A thickness of 6 inches will sustain traffic of 
 600 tons per foot of width. 
 
 Cushion Coat. Between the surface of the concrete and the base 
 of the blocks, there must be placed a cushion coat formed of an 
 incompressible but mobile material, the particles of which readily 
 will adjust themselves to the irregularities of the bases of the blocks 
 
130 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 and transfer the pressure of the traffic uniformly to the concrete 
 below. A layer of dry, clean sand 1 inch to 2 inches thick forms an 
 excellent cushion coat. Its particles must be of such fineness as to 
 pass through a No. 8 screen; if the sand is coarse and contains peb- 
 bles, it will not adapt itself to the irregularities of the bases of the 
 blocks; hence the blocks will be supported at a few points only, and 
 unequal settlement will take place when the pavement is subjected 
 to the action of traffic. The sand also must be perfectly free from 
 'moisture, and artificial heat must be used to dry it if necessary. 
 This requirement is an absolute necessity. There should be no 
 moisture below the blocks when laid; nor should water be allowed 
 to penetrate below the blocks; if such happens, the effect of frost 
 will be to upheave the pavement and crack the concrete. 
 
 Where the best is desired without regard to cost, a layer of 
 asphaltic cement \ inch thick may be substituted for the sand, with 
 superior and very satisfactory results. 
 
 Laying Blocks. The blocks should be laid stone to stone, so that 
 the joint may be of the least possible width; wide joints cause 
 increased wear and noise, and do not increase the foothold. The 
 courses should be commenced on each side and should be worked 
 toward the middle; and the last stone should fit tightly. 
 
 Ramming. After the blocks have been set, they should be well 
 rammed down; and the stones which sink below the general level 
 should be taken up and replaced with a deeper stone or brought to 
 level by increasing the sand bedding. 
 
 The practice of workmen invariably is to use the rammer so as 
 to secure a fair surface. This does not give the result intended to be 
 secured, but brings each block to an unyielding bearing. The result 
 of such a surfacing process is to produce an unsightly and uneven 
 roadway when the pressure of traffic is brought upon it. The 
 rammer used should weigh not less than 50 pounds and have a 
 diameter of not less than 3 inches. 
 
 Fillings for Joints. All stone-block pavements depend for their 
 waterproof qualities upon the character of the joint filling. Joints 
 filled with sand and gravel of course are pervious. A grout of lime 
 or cement mortar does not make a permanently waterproof joint; it 
 becomes disintegrated under the vibration of traffic. An impervious 
 joint can be made only by employing a filling made from bituminous 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 131 
 
 or asphaltic material; this renders the pavement more impervious 
 to moisture, makes it less noisy, and adds considerably to its 
 strength. 
 
 Bituminous Cement for Joint Filling. The bituminous materials 
 employed are: (1) coal tar having a specific gravity between 1.23 
 and 1.33 at 60 degrees Fahrenheit, a melting point between 120 and 
 130 degrees Fahrenheit, and containing not over 30 per cent of free 
 carbon. (2) asphalt, either natural or artificial, entirely free from 
 coal tar or any product of coal-tar distillation, and containing not 
 less than 98 per cent of pure bitumen soluble in carbon bisulphide. 
 Of the total amount soluble in carbon bisulphide, 98.5 per cent must 
 be soluble in carbon tetrachloride. The penetration, when tested 
 by the Dow method, must be not greater than 110, at 115 degrees 
 Fahrenheit, and at 77 degrees Fahrenheit must range between 25 
 and 60. The specific gravity at 60 degrees Fahrenheit must not be 
 more than 1.00. 
 
 The mode of applying the coal-tar filler is as follows : After the 
 blocks are laid, gravel heated to about 250 degrees Fahrenheit 
 is spread over the surface and swept into the joints until they are 
 filled to a depth of about 2 inches. The blocks then are rammed. 
 The coal-tar filler heated to a temperature between 250 and 300 
 degrees Fahrenheit is poured into the joints until they are about 
 half filled, hot gravel is swept in until it reaches to within | inch 
 of the surface, and hot filler is then poured in until it is flush with 
 the surface of the blocks; after this sufficient hot gravel is applied 
 to the joints to conceal the filler. 
 
 In applying the coal-tar filler it is essential that both the gravel 
 and filler are heated sufficiently. Otherwise the filler will be chilled 
 and will not flow to the bottom of the joint, but will form a thin layer 
 near the surface, which under the action of frost and the vibration 
 of traffic, will be cracked and broken up quickly; the gravel will 
 settle, and the blocks will be jarred loose, causing the surface of 
 the pavement to become a series of ridges and hollows. The filler 
 should not be applied during a rainfall or while the blocks are wet 
 or damp, for such a condition would prevent the filler from adhering 
 to the blocks. The asphalt filler is heated to a temperature between 
 400 and 450 degrees Fahrenheit and poured into the joints until 
 they are entirely filled. 
 
132 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Hydraulic-Cement Filler is composed of equal parts of Portland 
 cement and sharp sand mixed with clean fresh water to a suitable 
 consistency. The joints between the blocks are filled to a depth 
 of 2 inches with gravel, and the blocks are rammed, after which 
 the filler is poured into the joints until they are filled flush with the 
 surface of the blocks. In dry weather the blocks should be mois- 
 tened by sprinkling with water before applying the filler. After 
 the filler has taken its initial set, the whole surface of the pavement 
 is covered with a layer of sand about J inch thick and if the weather 
 is dry and warm it is sprinkled with water daily for three days. 
 Traffic is not permitted to use the pavement until at least seven 
 days after completion. 
 
 Stone Pavement on Steep Grades. Stone blocks may be 
 employed on all practicable grades, but on grades exceeding 10 
 
 per cent, cobblestones 
 afford a better foothold 
 than blocks. The cob- 
 blestones should be of uni- 
 form length, the length 
 being at least twice the 
 breadth say stones 6 
 inches long and 2| inches 
 to 3 inches in diameter. 
 These should be set on a concrete foundation, laid stone to stone, 
 and the interstices filled with cement grout or bituminous cement; 
 or a bituminous-concrete foundation may be employed and the 
 
 interstices between the 
 stones may be filled with 
 asphaltic paving cement. 
 Should stone blocks be 
 preferred, they must be 
 laid, when the grade ex- 
 ceeds 5 per cent, with a 
 serrated surface, by either 
 of the methods shown in 
 Figs. 82 and 83. The method shown in Fig. 82 consists in slightly 
 tilting the blocks on their bed so as to form a series of ledges or 
 steps, which will insure a good foothold for horses' hoofs. The 
 
 Fig. 82. 
 
 Laying Stone Pavement on Steep Grades by 
 Tilting Blocks 
 
 Fig. 83. Laying Stone Pavement on Steep Grades by 
 Separating Blocks and Filling with Grout 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 133 
 
 method shown in Fig. 83 consists in placing between the rows of 
 stones a course of slate, or strips of creosoted wood, rather less 
 than 1 inch in thickness and about 1 inch less in depth than the 
 blocks; or the blocks may be spaced about 1 inch apart, and the 
 joints filled with a grout composed of gravel and cement. The 
 pebbles of the gravel should vary in size between f inch and f inch, 
 
 BRICK PAVEMENTS 
 
 A brick pavement consists of vitrified bricks laid on a suitable 
 concrete foundation, Fig. 84. 
 
 Qualifications of Brick. The qualities essential to a .good 
 paving brick are the same as for any other paving material, viz, 
 hardness, toughness, and ability to resist the disintegrating effects 
 
 Vitrified Brick- 
 
 Fig. 84. Section Showing Method of Laying Vitrified Brick Pavement 
 
 of water and frost. These qualities are imparted to the brick by 
 a process of annealing, through which the clay is brought to the 
 point of fusion, and the heat then gradually reduced until the kiln 
 is cold. 
 
 Composition. The material from which is made the majority 
 of the brick used for paving is a shale. Shales are indurated clays 
 with a laminated structure and the appearance of slate, and occur 
 in stratified beds. The average composition of the shales that 
 have proved satisfactory for the manufacture of paving brick is 
 shown in Table XIV. 
 
 An excess of silica causes brittleness; or an excess of alumina 
 causes shrinking, cracking, and warping. Iron renders the clay 
 fusible and makes the brick more homogeneous. Lime in the form 
 of silicate is valuable as a flux, but in the form of carbonate it will 
 
134 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE XIV 
 
 Average Composition of Shales for Paving- 
 Brick Manufacture 
 
 CONSTITUENTS 
 
 PROPORTIONAL 
 PART 
 (per cent) 
 
 (Non-Fluxing) 
 
 Silica . 
 Alumina 
 Water and loss on ignition 
 Moisture 
 
 56.0 
 22.0 
 7.0 
 2.0 
 
 (Fluxing) 
 Sesquioxide of iron 
 Lime 
 Magnesia 
 Alkalies 
 
 7.0 
 1.0 
 1.0 
 4.0 
 
 Total 
 
 100.0 
 
 decrease the strength of the brick; at a high temperature it is changed 
 into caustic lime, which, while rendering the clay more fusible, will 
 absorb moisture upon exposure to the weather and thus cause the 
 brick to disintegrate. Magnesia exerts but little influence on the 
 character of the brick. The alkalies in small quantities render 
 the clay fusible. 
 
 Color. The color of the clay is of no practical importance; 
 it is due to the presence of the metallic oxides and organic substances. 
 Iron produces bricks which are either red, yellow, or blue, according 
 to the quantity present and the degree of heat; some organic sub- 
 stances produce a blue, bluish-gray, or black color. 
 
 The color of the brick is governed partly by the color of the 
 clay, by the temperature of burning, by the kind of fuel used, and 
 by the sand that is used to prevent the brick from sticking to the 
 dies or to each other in the kiln. 
 
 Manufacture. In the manufacture of the brick, the shale is 
 crushed usually in dry paws and then passed through a 4-mesh or 
 an 8-mesh screen. The screened material is mixed with water in 
 a pug mill to the required consistency. The finer the material 
 is crushed and the more thoroughly it is worked or tempered in 
 the mill, the more uniform and better the brick is. 
 
 The plastic clay, in the "stiff-mud" process, as it leaves the pug 
 mill is forced by an auger through a die which forms a bar of stiff 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 135 
 
 clay of the desired dimensions, and this is cut by an automatic cutter 
 into bricks of the size required. The bricks then, in some factories, 
 are repressed in a die, during which the edges of the brick are rounded 
 and the lugs, grooves, and trade-mark stamped on the sides. When 
 repressing is not practiced, the bar of clay as it comes from the pug 
 mill is cut by wires, the brick being called "wire-cut lug" brick. 
 
 The bricks, made by either method, are placed in a heated 
 chamber to dry, this requiring from 18 to 60 hours according to the 
 clay, temperature, and plant arrangement. When dry the bricks 
 are stacked in the kiln, which is usually of the down-draft type with 
 furnaces built in the outer w r alls. The bottom of the kiln is perfo- 
 rated to allow the gases to pass through to the flues placed below the 
 floor and connected to the chimney. The heat from the furnace 
 passes upward into the kiln, then downward through the bricks 
 into the flues and thence to the chimney. At the beginning of the 
 burning the heat is applied slowly to drive off the contained water 
 without cracking the bricks. When the dryness of the smoke 
 indicates the absence of moisture in the bricks, the fires are gradually 
 increased until the temperature throughout the kiln is from 1500 
 to 2000 degrees Fahrenheit, this temperature being maintained from 
 seven to ten days. The kiln then is closed, the fires are drawn, and 
 the bricks are allowed to cool. This part of the process is called 
 annealing, and to produce a tough brick requires from seven to ten 
 days. The cooled bricks are sorted into different lots; the No. 1 
 paving bricks are generally found in the upper layers in the kiln. 
 
 Sizes. Two sizes of bricks are made: one size measuring 8JX 
 2| X 4 inches weighing about 7 pounds and requiring 58 to the square 
 yard. The other, measuring 8 J X 3 J X 4 inches and frequently called 
 "blocks", weighs about 9J pounds and requires 45 to the square 
 yard. 
 
 Characteristics. The characteristics of brick suitable for paving 
 are : not to be acted upon by acids shale bricks not to absorb more 
 than 2 per cent nor less than ^ of 1 per cent of their weight of water, 
 and clay bricks not to absorb more than 6 per cent of their weight 
 of water (the absorption by a shale brick of less than | of 1 per cent 
 of its weight of water, indicates that it has been overburned) ; when 
 broken with a hammer, to show a dense close-grained structure? free 
 from lime, air holes, cracks, or marked laminations; not to scale, 
 
136 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 spall, or chip, when quickly struck on the edges; hard but not 
 brittle. 
 
 Tests for Paving Brick. To ascertain if brick possesses the 
 required qualities they are subjected to three tests: (1) abrasion 
 by impact (commonly called the "rattler" test); (2) absorption; 
 (3) cross breaking. 
 
 The Rattler Test. The rattler is a steel barrel 28 inches long and 
 28 inches in diameter, the sides formed of 14 staves fastened to two 
 cast-iron heads furnished with trunnions which rest in a cast-iron 
 frame. It is provided with gears and a belt pulley arranged to 
 revolve at a rate of from 29 J to 30 J revolutions per minute. The 
 material employed to abrade the brick is spherical balls of cast iron, 
 the composition of which is: combined carbon, not less than 2.50 per 
 cent; graphitic carbon, not more than 0.10 per cent; silicon, not more 
 than 1 per cent; manganese, not more than 0.50 per cent; phos- 
 phorus, not more than 0.25 per cent; sulphur, not more than 0.08 
 per cent. Two sizes of balls or shot are used, the larger being 3.75 
 inches in diameter when new and weighing about 7J pounds, the 
 smaller being 1.875 inches in diameter and weighing 0.95 pounds. 
 A charge consists of ten large shot with enough small shot to make 
 a weight of 300 pounds. The shot is used until the large size is worn 
 to a weight of 7 pounds and the small shot is worn to a size that will 
 pass through a circular hole If inches in diameter made in a cast- 
 iron plate J-inch thick. 
 
 The brick to be tested are subjected to a temperature of 100 
 degrees Fahrenheit for three hours. Ten bricks are weighed and 
 placed in the rattler with a charge of spherical shot, and the rattler 
 is revolved for 1800 revolutions. The bricks then are taken out, 
 pieces less than 1 pound in weight are removed and the balance 
 weighed. From the weights before and after rattling the percent- 
 age of loss is calculated. The loss ranges from 16 per cent to 40 per 
 cent. Brick to be used under heavy traffic should not lose more than 
 22 per cent, and for light traffic not more than 28 per cent. 
 
 Absorption Test. The absorption test is made on five bricks 
 that have been through the rattler test. They are weighed, and 
 are immersed in water for 48 hours, then are taken out and weighed, 
 with the surplus water wiped off. From the weights before and after 
 immersion the percentage of water absorbed is calculated. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 137 
 
 Cross-Breaking Test. This test is made by placing a brick edge 
 on supports 6 inches apart. The load is applied at the center of 
 the brick, and is increased uniformly until fracture occurs. The 
 average of the result on ten bricks is used in computing the modulus 
 
 OTJ77 
 
 of rupture, R=r^-', in which IF is the average breaking load in 
 
 pounds, L the length between supports in inches, b the breadth, 
 and d the depth in inches. 
 
 Brick=Pavement Qualifications. Advantages. The advantages 
 of brick pavement may be stated as follows: 
 
 (1) Easy traction. 
 
 (2) Good foothold for horses. 
 
 (3) Not disagreeably noisy. 
 
 (4) Yields but little dust and mud. 
 
 (5) Adapted to all grades. 
 
 (6) Easily repaired. 
 
 (7) Easily cleaned. 
 
 (8) But slightly absorbent. 
 
 (9) Pleasing to the eye. 
 
 (10) Expeditiously laid. 
 
 (11) Durable under moderate traffic. 
 
 Defects. The principal defects of brick pavements arise from 
 lack of uniformity in the quality of the bricks, and from the liability 
 of incorporating in the pavement bricks too soft or too porous a 
 structure, which crumbles under the action of traffic or frost. 
 
 Foundation. A brick pavement should have a firm foundation. 
 As the surface is made up of small, independent blocks, each one 
 must be supported adequately, or the load coming upon it may force 
 it downwards and cause unevenness, a condition which conduces 
 to the rapid destruction of the pavement. Several forms of founda- 
 tion have been used such as gravel, plank, sand, broken stone, 
 and concrete. The last mentioned is the best. 
 
 Sand Cushion. The sand cushion is a layer of sand placed 
 on top of the concrete to form a bed for the brick. Practice regard- 
 ing the depth of this layer of sand varies considerably. In some 
 cases it is only | inch deep, varying from this up to 3 inches. The 
 sand cushion is very desirable, as it not only forms a perfectly 
 true and even surface upon which to place brick, but also makes the 
 
138 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 pavement less hard and rigid than would be the case were the brick 
 laid directly on the concrete. 
 
 The sand is spread evenly, sprinkled with water, smoothed, 
 and brought to the proper contour by screeds or wooden templets, 
 properly trussed and mounted on wheels or shoes which bear upon 
 the upper surface of the curb. Moving the templet forward levels 
 and forms the sand to a uniform surface and proper shape. 
 
 The sand used for the cushion coat should be clean and free from 
 loam, moderately coarse, and free from pebbles exceeding J inch 
 in size. 
 
 Manner of Laying. The bricks should be laid on edge or on 
 one flat, as closely and compactly as possible, in straight courses 
 across the street, with the length of the bricks at right angles to 
 the axis of the street. Joints should be broken by at least 3 inches. 
 None but whole bricks should be used, except in starting a course 
 or making a closure. To provide for the expansion of the pavement, 
 both longitudinal and transverse expansion joints are used, the 
 former being made by placing a board templet J-inch thick 
 against the curb and abutting the brick thereto. The transverse 
 joints are formed at intervals varying between 25 and 50 feet, by 
 placing a templet or building lath f-inch thick between two or three 
 rows of brick. After the bricks are rammed and ready for grouting, 
 these templets are removed, and the spaces so left are filled with 
 coal-tar pitch or asphaltic paving cement. The amount of pitch 
 or cement required will vary between 1 and 1J pounds per square 
 yard of pavement, depending upon the width of the joints. After 
 25 or 30 feet of the pavement is laid, every part of it should be rammed 
 with a rammer weighing not less than 50 pounds and the bricks 
 which sink below the general level should be removed, sufficient 
 sand being added to raise the brick to the required level. After 
 all objectionable brick have been removed, the surface should be 
 swept clean, then rolled with a steam roller weighing from 3 to 6 
 tons. The object of rolling is to bring the bricks to an unyielding 
 bearing with a plane surface; if this is not done, the pavement 
 will be rough and noisy and will lack durability. The rolling should 
 be executed first longitudinally, beginning at the crown and working 
 toward the gutter, taking care that each return trip of the roller 
 covers exactly the same area as the preceding trip, so that the second 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 139 
 
 passage may neutralize any careening of the brick. due to the first 
 passage. 
 
 The manner of laying brick at street intersections is shown in 
 Fig. 85. 
 
 Joint Fillings. The character of the material used in filling 
 the joints between the brick has considerable influence on the success 
 
 Fig. 85. Method of Laying Bricks at Street Intersections 
 
 and durability of the pavement. Various materials have been 
 used such as sand, coal-tar pitch, asphalt, mixtures of coal tar 
 and asphalt, and Portland cement, besides various patented fillers, 
 as "Murphy's grout", which is made from ground slag and cement. 
 Each material has its advocates, and there is much difference of 
 opinion as to which gives the best results. 
 
 The best results seem to be obtained by using a high grade of 
 Portland cement containing the smallest amount of lime in its 
 
140 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 composition; the presence of the lime increasing the tendency of 
 the filler to swell through absorption of moisture, causing the pave- 
 ment to rise or to be lifted away from its foundation, and thus 
 producing the roaring or rumbling noise so frequently complained of. 
 The Portland-cement grout, when uniformly mixed and care- 
 fully placed, resists the impact of traffic and wears well with brick. 
 When a failure occurs, repairs can be made quickly, and, if made 
 early, the pavement will be restored to a good condition. If, how- 
 ever, repairs are neglected, the brick soon loosen and the pave- 
 ment fails. 
 
 Fig. 86. Grout Box Used in Laying Brick Pavement 
 Courtesy of National Paving Brick Manufacturers Association, Cleveland, Ohio 
 
 The office of a filler is to prevent water from reaching the founda- 
 tion, and to protect the edges of the brick from spalling under 
 traffic. In order to meet both of these requirements, every joint 
 must be filled to the top, and must remain so, wearing down with 
 the brick. Sand does not meet these requirements. Although at 
 first making a good filler, being inexpensive and reducing the liability 
 of the pavement to be noisy, it soon washes out, leaving the edges 
 of the brick unprotected and consequently liable to be chipped. 
 Coal tar and the mixtures of coal tar and asphalt have an advantage 
 in rendering a pavement less noisy and in cementing together any 
 breaks that may occur through upheavals from frost or other causes; 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 141 
 
 but, unless made very hard, they have the disadvantage of becoming 
 soft in hot weather and flowing to the gutters and low places in 
 the pavement, there forming a black and unsightly scale and leaving 
 the high parts unprotected. The joints, thus deprived of their filling, 
 become receptacles for water, mud, and ice in turn; and the edges 
 of the brick are broken down quickly. Some of these mixtures 
 become so brittle in winter that they crack and fly out of the joints 
 under the action of traffic. 
 
 The Portland-cement filler is prepared by mixing 2 parts of 
 cement and 1 part of fine sand with sufficient water to make a thin 
 grout. The most convenient arrangement for preparing and dis- 
 tributing the grout is a water-tight wooden box carried on four 
 wood wheels about 12 inches in diameter, Fig. 86. The box 
 may be about 4 feet wide, 7 feet long, and 12 inches deep, furnished 
 with a gate about 8 inches wide, in the rear end. The box should 
 be mounted on the wheels with an inclination, so that the rear end 
 is about 4 inches lower than the front end. 
 
 Following are the successive operations of placing the filler: 
 The cement and sand are placed in the box, and sufficient water is 
 added to make a thin grout. The grouting box is located about 
 12 feet from the gutter, the end gate opened, and about 2 cubic 
 feet of the grout allowed to flow out and run over the top of the 
 brick (care being taken to stir the grout while it is being dis- 
 charged), Fig. 87. If the brick are very dry, the entire surface of 
 the pavement should be wet thoroughly with a hose before applying 
 the grout; if not, absorption of the water from the grout by the 
 bricks will prevent adhesion between the bricks and the cement 
 grout. The grout is swept into the joints by ordinary bass brooms. 
 After a length of about 100 feet of the pavement has been covered 
 the box is returned to the starting point, and the operation is 
 repeated with a grout somewhat thicker than the first. If this second 
 application is not sufficient to fill the joints, the operation is repeated 
 as often as may be necessary to fill them. If the grout has been 
 made too thin, or the grade of the street is so great that the grout 
 will not remain long enough in place to set, dry cement may be 
 sprinkled over the joints and swept in. After the joints are filled 
 completely and inspected, allowing three or four hours to intervene, 
 the completed pavement should be covered with sand to a depth 
 
7\ 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 143 
 
 of about J inch, and the roadway barricaded, and no traffic allowed 
 on it for at least ten days. 
 
 The object of covering the pavement with sand is to prevent 
 the grout from drying or settling too rapidly; hence, in dry and 
 windy weather, it should be sprinkled from time to time. If coarse 
 sand is employed in the grout, it will separate from the cement 
 during the operation of filling the joints, with the result that many 
 joints will be filled with sand and very little cement, while others 
 will be filled with cement and little or no sand; thus there will be 
 
 Fig. 88. Coal-Tar Heating Tank 
 
 Courtesy of Barber Asphalt Paving Company, 
 
 Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 
 
 many spots in the pavement in which no bond is formed between 
 the bricks, and under the action of traffic these portions quickly 
 will become defective. 
 
 The coal-tar filler is best applied by pouring the material from 
 buckets, and brooming it into the joints with wire brooms; and in 
 order to fill the joints effectually, it must be used only when very 
 hot. To secure this condition, a heating tank on wheels is necessary, 
 Fig. 88. It should have a capacity of at least 5 barrels, and be kept 
 at a uniform temperature all day. One man is necessary to feed 
 the fire and draw the material into the buckets; another, to carry 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 145 
 
 the buckets from the heating tank to a third, who pours the material 
 over the street. The latter starts to pour in the center of the street, 
 working backward toward the curb, and pouring a strip about 2 feet 
 in width. A fourth man, with a wire broom, follows immediately 
 after him, sweeping the surplus material toward the pourer and in 
 the direction of the curb. This method leaves the entire surface 
 of the pavement covered with a thin coating of pitch, which 
 immediately should be covered with a light coating of sand, the 
 sand becoming imbedded in the pitch. Under the action of traffic, 
 this thin coating is worn away quickly, leaving the surface of the 
 bricks clean and smooth, Fig. 89. 
 
 Tools Used by Hand in the Construction of Block Pavements. 
 The principal tools required in constructing block pavements com- 
 prise hammers and rammers of varying sizes and shapes, depending 
 on the material and size of the blocks to be laid; also crcnvbars, sand 
 screens, and rattan and wire brooms. Cobblestones, square blocks, 
 and brick require different types both of hammer and rammers 
 for adjusting them to place and for forcing them to their seats. 
 A cobblestone rammer, for example, is usually made of wood (gener- 
 ally locust) in the shape of a long truncated cone, banded with 
 iron at top and bottom, weighing about 40 pounds, and having 
 two handles, one at the top and another on one side. A Belgian- 
 block rammer is slightly heavier, consisting of an upper part of 
 wood set in a steel base; while a rammer for granite blocks is still 
 heavier, comprising an iron base with cast-steel face, into which 
 is set a locust plug with hickory handles. For laying brick, a 
 wooden rammer shod with cast iron or steel and weighing about 27 
 pounds is used. A light rammer of about 20 pounds weight, consist- 
 ing of a metallic base attached to a long, slim, wooden handle, is 
 used for miscellaneous work, such as tamping in trenches, next to 
 curbs, etc. 
 
 Concrete=Mixing Machine. Where large quantities of concrete 
 are required, as in the foundations of improved pavements, concrete 
 can be prepared more expeditiously and economically by the use of 
 mechanical mixers, and the ingredients will be mixed more thoroughly 
 than by hand. Thorough incorporation of the ingredients is an 
 essential element in the quality of a concrete. When mixed by 
 hand, however, the incorporation is rarely complete, because it 
 
146 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 depends upon the proper manipulation of the hoe and shovel. The 
 manipulation, although extremely simple, is rarely performed by 
 the ordinary laborer as it should be unless he is watched constantly 
 by the overseer. 
 
 Several varieties of concrete-mixing machines are in the market, 
 all of which are efficient and of good design. A convenient portable 
 
 Fig. 90. Smith Concrete Mixer on Truck with Gasoline Engine, 
 
 Power Charger, and Water Tank 
 Courtesy of T. L. Smith Company, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 
 
 type is illustrated in Fig. 90. The capacity of the mixers ranges 
 from 5 to 20 cubic yards per hour, depending upon size, regularity 
 with which the materials are supplied, speed, etc. 
 
 Gravel Heaters. A special type of oven usually is employed 
 for heating the gravel used for joint filling in stone-block pavements. 
 These heaters are made in various sizes, a common size being 9 feet 
 long, 5 feet wide, and 3 feet 9 inches high. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 147 
 
 WOOD=BLOCK PAVEMENTS 
 
 Wood-block pavements, Fig. 91, are formed of rectangular blocks 
 measuring from 3J to 4 inches wide, 5 to 10 inches long, and 4 inches 
 deep, impregnated with creosote, or other preservative, laid in a 
 bed of Portland-cement mortar spread upon a concrete foundation, 
 with the joints between the blocks filled with either Portland-cement 
 grout, or a bituminous filler. 
 
 The wood used is obtained from the long-leaved yellow pine 
 (pinus palustrus), lob-lolly pine (pinus taeda), short-leaved pine 
 (pinus echinata), Cuba pine (pinus heterophylla), black gum (nyssa 
 sylvatica), red gum (liquidambar styrraciflua), Norway pine (pinus 
 resinosa), or tamarack (larix laricina). 
 
 The wood should be cut from sound trees, free from cracks, 
 snakes, and knots. 
 
 The great enemy of 
 wood pavement is decay 
 due to a low form of 
 plant life called fungi. 
 The fungi attack the 
 wood from the outside, 
 and if the wood is in the 
 
 right Condition for the Fig 91> Section Showing Foundation for Wood-Block 
 
 spores to grow, they ulti- 
 mately will penetrate the entire structure of the wood. There 
 are three classes of fungi: one which attacks all parts of the 
 wood structure; another which attacks the cellulose; and a third, 
 which is the most common, and attacks only the lignin the name 
 of the many organic substances that are incrusted around the cellu- 
 lose, and which with the latter constitute the essential part of woody 
 tissue here the fungi dissolve the lignin and the cellulose to make 
 food for their development. Heat, air, and moisture are necessary 
 to the existence of the fungi; without any one of these elements 
 they cannot live. To destroy the fungus life and preserve wood 
 from decay many processes have been devised; the one that seems 
 to meet the requirements better than any other is the process of 
 creosoting. 
 
 Creosoting. This process consists in impregnating the wood 
 with the dead oil of tar, called "creosote", from which the ammonia 
 
148 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 has been removed. Its effect on the wood is to coagulate the albu- 
 men and thereby prevent its decomposition, also to fill the pores of 
 the wood with a bituminous substance which excludes both air and 
 moisture, and which is obnoxious to the lower forms of animal and 
 vegetable life. 
 
 The coal-tar creosote oil is used without admixture or adultera- 
 tion with other oils or tars. Its characteristics are : specific gravity, 
 1.03 to 1.08, at a temperature of 100 degrees Fahrenheit; contain 
 not more than 5 per cent of tarry matter, nor more than 2 per cent 
 of water, and not more than 8 per cent of tar acids, 99 per cent to 
 be soluble in hot benzol ; when subjected to distillation at gradually 
 increasing temperatures up to 400 degrees Fahrenheit not more than 
 
 5 per cent of distillate shall pass over, at 450 degrees not more than 
 35 per cent, and up to 600 degrees Fahrenheit not more than 80 per 
 cent; after complete distillation not more than 2 per cent of coke 
 shall remain; upon sulphonating a sample of the total distillate, the 
 residue shall not exceed 1 per cent. 
 
 For applying the creosote to the wood, several methods are 
 followed. The one in most favor for paving blocks is the "pressure 
 process", which essentially consists in: (1) steaming the w T ood for 
 the purpose of liquefying the sap and other substances contained in 
 the interfibrous spaces; (2) creating a vacuum for the purpose of 
 removing the liquefied substances; (3) injecting the creosote under 
 pressure. 
 
 The operation is performed in metal cylinders called "retorts", 
 
 6 or more feet in diameter and of any desired length, usually about 
 100 feet. The load of blocks, called a "charge", is placed upon 
 metal cars called "buggies" and is run into the retort cylinder, the 
 ends of which then are hermetically closed w r ith "heads" or doors. 
 Steam, at a gage pressure varying from 15 pounds to 45 pounds per 
 square inch, is admitted to the retort (in some plants a vacuum is 
 first created) and the pressure maintained for several hours. When 
 the operator considers that the steaming has been continued a suffi- 
 cient length of time, the products of condensation are removed from 
 the retort through a blow-off cock in the bottom; when this is accom- 
 plished an air exhaust, or vacuum pump is put in operation, and a 
 vacuum of from 20 inches to 26 inches is created and maintained 
 for about one hour, at the end of which time the creosote is allowed 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 149 
 
 to flow into the retort until it is filled. A pressure pump then is 
 started to force the creosote into the retort until the pressure reaches 
 100 pounds to 150 pounds per square inch. This pressure is main- 
 tained until the required amount of creosote has been injected in 
 the wood, then the surplus is drawn off, the heads opened, and the 
 charge withdrawn. 
 
 The amount of creosote injected into the wood varies from 10 
 pounds to 22 pounds per cubic foot of wood. The amount is deter- 
 mined primarily by measuring the tanks and is verified by testing 
 sample blocks. A sample block is bored entirely through in the 
 direction of the fiber with an auger 1 inch in diameter, the hole 
 being located midway between the sides and about J the length of 
 the block from one end. The borings are collected, thoroughly 
 mixed, and the quantity and ratio of creosote to wood in the borings 
 determined by extracting the creosote completely with carbon 
 bisulphide. 
 
 The condition of the wood at the time of the treatment, is prefer- 
 ably dry and free from an excess of water. After treatment, and 
 until used, the blocks during dry weather should be sprinkled fre- 
 quently with water to prevent drying and cracking. The treated 
 blocks are sometimes subjected to tests to determine the resistance 
 to wear when saturated with water, the resistance to compression 
 and impact, and to ascertain the amount of water the wood will 
 absorb. 
 
 Laying the Blocks. The surface of the concrete foundation is 
 cleansed from dust and dirt by sweeping, then sprinkled with water. 
 Upon the cleaned surface a cushion coat is formed, by spreading a 
 layer of sand 1 inch thick, Fig. 92, or a mortar composed of 1 part 
 Portland cement and 2 parts sand, mixed with sufficient water to 
 form a stiff paste (the practice of using a mixture of cement and 
 sand slightly moistened with water produces a defective pavement). 
 The blocks are set upon the cushion coat with the fiber vertical, 
 Fig. 93, in straight, parallel courses at right angles to the axis of the 
 street, except at intersections where they are set at an angle of 45 
 degrees with the axis of the street. They are laid so as to have the 
 least possible width of joint (wide joints hasten the destruction of 
 the wood by permitting the fibres to broom and wear under traffic) . 
 Blocks in adjoining courses break joint by at least 3 inches. At the 
 
150 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Fig. 92. Spreading Sand Foundation for Wood Blocks in LaSalle Street, Chicago 
 Courtesy of Engineering News, New York City 
 
 Fig. 93. Laying Wood Blocks in LaSalle Street, Chicago 
 Courtesy of Engineering News, New York City 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 151 
 
 Fig. 94. Wood-Block Pavement Being Hammered and Rolled, Preparatory to Putting in Filler 
 Courtesy of Engineering News, New York City 
 
 Fig. 95. Spreading Sand Filler on Wood-Block Pavement 
 Courtesy of Engineering News, New York City 
 
152 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 curb it is customary to place one or two rows of blocks with the 
 length parallel to the curb and f inch therefrom. 
 
 After the blocks are laid they are brought to a uniform surface 
 by ramming with hand rammers or rolling with a light steam roller, 
 Fig. 94. When laid upon a mortar cushion, the rolling or ramming 
 must be completed before the mortar sets. 
 
 In some cases the cushion coat is omitted, the surface of the 
 concrete freed from dust by dry sweeping is covered with a thin 
 coat of a bituminous cement and the blocks laid directly upon it. 
 Sometimes, the side and one end of each block, when it is about to 
 be set in place, are dipped in the same bituminous material that is 
 used to cover the concrete, the blocks are placed in contact and the 
 surface is covered with a thin coating of the bituminous material, 
 this being covered with a layer of sand or fine gravel. 
 
 After the blocks have been brought to a uniform surface, the 
 joints are filled with either fine sand, cement grout, or a bituminous 
 cement, Fig. 95. When sand is used, it should be fine and dry, 
 spread over the surface of the pavement, and swept about until the 
 joints are filled. Cement grout is made of equal parts of Portland 
 cement and fine sand mixed with water to the required consistency. 
 It is spread over the surface of the blocks and swept into the joints 
 until they are filled. The surface of the pavement then is covered 
 with sand, and the grout is allowed to set for about seven days 
 before traffic is admitted. The bituminous filler is composed of 
 coal-tar pitch, asphalt, or combinations of these, and other ingre- 
 dients. The filler is applied hot in the same manner as described 
 under brick pavement. To provide for the expansion of the blocks 
 the joint next the curb is filled with bituminous filler. 
 
 Qualifications of Wood Pavements. Advantages. The advan- 
 tages of wood pavement may be stated as follows: 
 
 (1) It affords good foothold for horses. 
 
 (2) It offers less resistance to traction than stone, and slightly 
 more than asphalt. 
 
 (3) It suits all classes of traffic. 
 
 (4) It may be used on grades up to 5 per cent. 
 
 (5) It is moderately durable. 
 
 (6) It yields no mud when laid upon an impervious foundation. 
 
 (7) It yields but little dust. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 153 
 
 (8) It is moderate in first cost. 
 
 (9) It is not disagreeably noisy. 
 
 Defects. The principal objections to wood pavement are : 
 
 (1) It is difficult to cleanse. 
 
 (2) Under certain conditions of the atmosphere it becomes 
 greasy and very unsafe for horses. This may be remedied by cover- 
 ing the surface with a thin layer of fine sand or gravel; a similar 
 treatment will absorb the oil which exudes during warm weather. 
 
 (3) It is not easy to open for the purpose of gaining access to 
 underground pipes, it being necessary to remove rather a large 
 surface for this purpose, which has to be left a little time after being 
 repaired before traffic again is allowed upon it. 
 
 ASPHALT PAVEMENTS 
 
 Sheet=Asphalt Pavement. Sheet asphalt is the name used to 
 describe a pavement having a wearing surface composed of sand 
 graded in predetermined proportions, of a fine material or filler, 
 and of asphalt cement, all incorporated by mixing in a mechanical 
 mixer, and laid upon a concrete foundation, the surface of the latter 
 being covered with a thin layer of bituminous concrete called a 
 "binder". 
 
 Asphalt Cement. This is prepared from solid bitumen, refined 
 and fluxed with (1) the residuum from paraffine petroleum; (2) the 
 residuum from asphaltic petroleum; (3) a mixture of paraffine and 
 asphaltic petroleum residuums; (4) natural malthas, or is prepared 
 from (5) solid residual bitumen produced in the distillation of 
 asphaltic petroleums, and fluxed with residuum oil produced from 
 the same material. 
 
 Refined asphalt is that freed from the combined water and 
 accompanying inorganic and organic matter. By comparatively 
 simple operations the several varieties of asphalt may be separated 
 from their impurities. Two methods are employed for refining; one 
 using steam and the other direct fire. In both methods the asphalt 
 is placed in tanks and slowly heated until thoroughly melted, and 
 during the melting the mass is agitated by a current of either air or dry 
 steam. The method of using steam is superior to the fire method. 
 In the latter method there always is danger of overheating, in addi- 
 tion to the formation of coke and the cracking of the hydrocarbons. 
 
154 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 The varieties of asphalt known as gilsonite and grahamite, which 
 are practically pure bitumen, do not require refining, but they are 
 used to a very small extent in paving. 
 
 The greater part of the solid bitumen used for paving in the 
 United States is obtained from the \Yest Indies and South America. 
 The more extensively used being that found at Trinidad, W. I., and 
 at Bermudez, Venezuela. The asphalts known by the trade names 
 ' 'California'' and "texaco" are produced by refining asphaltic oils, 
 and may or may not require to be fluxed. 
 
 Fluxes are fluid oils and tars which are mixed with asphalt to 
 produce a desired consistency. The refined asphalt is melted and 
 the flux previously heated added to it, in the proportion required to 
 produce the desired consistency. The mixture of asphalt and flux 
 is agitated either by mechanical means or by a blast of air until the 
 materials are thoroughly incorporated and the desired consistency 
 is obtained. 
 
 Sand. The sand should be siliceous and so free from organic 
 matter, mica, soft grains, and other impurities, that these will not 
 amount to more than 2 per cent of its volume. 
 
 Fine Material or Filler. This consists of any sound stone, 
 usually limestone or sand, pulverized to such fineness that the whole 
 will pass the No. 50 sieve, and not more than 10 per cent will be 
 retained on the No. 100 sieve, and at least 70 per cent will pass the 
 No. 200 sieve. Portland cement sometimes is used instead of the 
 pulverized stone. 
 
 The paving composition is prepared by heating the ingredients 
 separately to a temperature between 300 and 350 degrees Fahren- 
 heit, then incorporating them by mixing in a mechanical mixer. 
 The hot sand is measured into the mixer, followed by the hot filler; 
 these two materials are thoroughly mixed together, and the hot 
 cement is added in such a way as to distribute it evenly over the 
 mixed sand and filler; the mixing then is continued until the materials 
 form a uniform and homogeneous mass, with the grains of sand 
 completely covered with cement. A typical mixture is: sand 100 
 pounds; filler 17.5 pounds; bitumen in asphalt cement 17.5 pounds. 
 
 The proportions of the ingredients in the paving mixture are 
 not constant, but vary with the climate of the place where the 
 pavement is to be used, the character of the sand, and the amount 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 155 
 
 and character of the traffic that will use the pavement. The ranges 
 are indicated in the following data: 
 
 Data for Asphaltic Paving 
 
 Asphaltic Paving Mixture. 
 
 CONSTITUENTS 
 Asphalt cement 
 Sand 
 Stone dust 
 
 PER CENT 
 12 to 15 
 
 70 to 83 
 5 to 15 
 
 Weight of Material. A cubic yard of the prepared material weighs about 
 4500 pounds. One ton of refined asphaltum makes about 2300 pounds of 
 asphalt cement, equal to about 3.4 cubic yards of surface material. 
 
 Wearing Surface per Cubic Yard of Material. 
 
 THICKNESS AREA 
 
 (inches) (sq. yd.) 
 
 21 12 
 
 2 IS 
 
 11 27 
 
 Laying the Pavement. The hot paving mixture is hauled to 
 the street and dumped at a place outside of the space m which it 
 
 spholttin. 
 
 inder l in. 
 Concrete 5 in. 
 
 Fig. 9f>. Section of Aephalt Pavement Showing Layers 
 
 is to be laid. It then is thrown into place with hot shovels, and 
 spread with hot rakes uniformly to such a depth as will give the 
 required thickness when compacted. The finished thickness 
 varies between 1| inches and 2 inches. The reduction of thickness 
 by compression is about 40 per cent generally. Before the mixture 
 is spread, the surfaces of curbs and street fittings that will be in 
 contact with it are painted with hot asphalt cement. 
 
 The pavement is constructed in two forms: (1) The paving 
 mixture is laid directly upon the surface of the concrete foundation; 
 
156 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 (2) the surface of the concrete foundation is covered with a coat 
 of asphaltic concrete, Fig. 96, called the "binder course", the object 
 of which is to unite more securely the wearing surface to the foun- 
 dation. This it does by containing a larger percentage of cement, 
 which, if put in the surface mixture, would render it too soft. The 
 binder is composed of sound, hard stone broken to pass a IJ-inch 
 screen, sand, pulverized stone, and asphalt cement, mixed in the 
 desired proportions. A typical mixture is: stone 100 pounds; 
 sand 40 pounds; stone dust 8 pounds; bitumen in asphalt cement 
 8 pounds. 
 
 The paving composition is compressed by means of rollers 
 and tamping irons, the latter being heated in a fire contained in an 
 iron basket mounted on wheels. These irons are used for tamping 
 such portions as are inaccessible to the roller, namely, gutters, 
 around manhole heads, etc. 
 
 Two rollers are sometimes employed; one, weighing 5 to 6 
 tons and of narrow tread, is used to give the first compression; 
 and the other, weighing about 10 tons and of broad tread, is used 
 for finishing. The rate of rolling varies; the average is about 1 
 hour for 1000 square yards of surface. After the primary com- 
 pression, natural hydraulic cement, or any impalpable mineral 
 matter, is sprinkled over the surface, to prevent the adhesion of 
 the material to the roller and to give the surface a more pleasing 
 appearance. When the asphalt is laid up to the curb, the surface 
 of the portion forming the gutter is painted with a coat of hot 
 cement. 
 
 Although asphaltum is a poor conductor of heat, and the cement 
 retains its plasticity for several hours, occasions may and do arise 
 through which the composition before it is spread has cooled; its 
 condition when this happens is analogous to hydraulic cement which 
 has taken a "set", and the same rules which apply to hydraulic 
 cement in this condition should be respected in regard to asphaltic 
 cement. 
 
 If the temperature of the air at the time of hauling is below 
 70 degrees Fahrenheit the wagons carrying it are covered with 
 canvas or other material to prevent the loss of heat. The tem- 
 perature when delivered at the place where it is to be used must 
 not be less than 280 degrees Fahrenheit. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 157 
 
 Two methods are followed in laying an asphalt pavement 
 adjoining street railway tracks: (1) a course of granite-block or 
 brick paving is laid between the rail and the edge of the asphalt; 
 (2) the asphalt is laid directly against the rail, which, if its tem- 
 perature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit, is heated by suitable 
 apparatus to a temperature of about 60 degrees Fahrenheit 
 immediately before the asphalt is laid. 
 
 Foundation. A solid, unyielding foundation is indispensable 
 with all asphaltic pavements, because asphalt of itself has no 
 power of offering resistance to the action of traffic, conse- 
 quently it nearly always is placed upon a bed of hydraulic- 
 cement concrete. The concrete must be set thoroughly and 
 its surface dry before the asphalt is laid upon it; if not, the 
 water will be sucked up and converted into steam, with the 
 result that coherence of the asphaltic mixture is prevented, and, 
 although its surface may be smooth, the mass is really honey- 
 combed, so that as soon as the pavement is subjected to the action 
 of traffic, the voids or fissures formed by the steam appear on 
 the surface, and the whole pavement is broken up quickly. 
 
 Qualifications of Asphalt Pavements. Advantages. These 
 may be summed up as follows : 
 
 (1) It gives easy traction. 
 
 (2) It is comparatively noiseless under traffic. 
 
 (3) It is impervious. 
 
 (4) It is easily cleansed. 
 
 (5) It produces neither mud nor dust. 
 
 (6) It is pleasing to the -eye. 
 
 (7) It suits all classes of traffic. 
 
 (8) There is neither vibration nor concussion in traveling 
 over it. 
 
 (9) It is laid expeditiously, thereby causing little inconvenience 
 to traffic. 
 
 (10) Openings to gain access to underground pipes are easily 
 made. 
 
 (11) It is durable. 
 
 (12) It is repaired easily. 
 Defects. These are as follows: 
 
 (1) It is slippery under certain conditions of the atmosphere. 
 
158 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 The American asphalts are much less so than the European, on 
 account of their granular texture derived from the sand. The 
 difference is very noticeable; the European are as smooth as glass, 
 
 
 
 Granite Curb\ 
 Vitrified BricK 
 
 "a 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 :". Sand , .;^. 
 
 
 fi 
 
 Asphalt 
 Binder 
 
 
 J 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 ^S^A:^^^', ||jj 
 
 Sand and Cement 
 
 I.;.'. \i..... -v; 
 
 i 
 
 r v- < . -/ V- ," r<rt>- 
 < \?' ^.'^ : <} 77- : : 
 
 
 
 
 ^.Vl''. 7 - 
 
 -I 
 .1 
 
 Fig. 97. Section of Asphalt Pavement Showing Use of Vitrified Brick to Form Gutter 
 
 while the American resemble fine sandpaper. The slipperiness 
 can be decreased by heating the surface of the pavement with a 
 surface heater, then applying a layer of coarse sand and rolling 
 it into the surface. 
 
 (2) It will not stand constant moisture, and will disintegrate 
 if sprinkled excessively. 
 
 (3) Under extreme heat it is liable to become so soft that it 
 will roll or creep under traffic and present a wavy surface; and 
 under extreme cold there is danger that the surface will crack and 
 become friable. 
 
 (4) It is not adapted to grades steeper than 2J per cent, 
 although it is in use on grades up to 7.30 per cent. 
 
 Asphalt 
 
 Brick Gutter 
 
 Curb 
 
 Fig. 98. Plan of Asphalt Pavement Showing Use of Vitrified 
 Brick to Form Gutter 
 
 (5) Repairs must be made quickly, for the material has little 
 coherence, and if, from irregular settlement of foundation or local 
 violence, a break occurs, the passing wheels- rapidly shear off the 
 sides of the hole, and it soon assumes formidable dimensions. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 159 
 
 Although pure asphaltum is impervious absolutely and insoluble 
 in either fresh or salt water, yet asphalt pavements in the continued 
 presence of water are quickly disintegrated. Ordinary rain or 
 daily sprinkling does not injure them when they are allowed to 
 become perfectly dry again. The damage is most apparent in 
 gutters and adjacent to overflowing drinking fountains. This 
 defect has long been recognized, and various measures have been 
 taken to overcome it, or at least reduce it to a minimum. In some 
 cities, ordinances have been passed, seeking to regulate the sprinkling 
 of the streets; and in many places the gutters are laid with stone 
 or vitrified brick, Figs. 97 and 98, while in others the asphalt is 
 laid to the curb, a space of 12 to 15 inches along the curb being 
 covered with a thin coating of asphalt cement. 
 
 Failure of Asphalt Pavement. The failure of asphalt pavement 
 is due to any one, or a combination, of the following causes: 
 
 (1) Unsuitable Materials. The asphalt may be changed so 
 by natural causes as to possess little or no cementing power. The 
 fluxing agent may form only a mechanical instead of a chemical 
 union w r ith the asphalt, or its character may be such as to render 
 the asphalt brittle, in which condition it easily is broken up under 
 traffic. The sand may be graded improperly, either too coarse or 
 too fine, or contain loam, vegetable matter, or clay. 
 
 (2) Improper Manipulation. The crude asphalt may have 
 been refined at too high a temperature, which reduces or destroys 
 the cementing property. The cement may be of improper con- 
 sistence, of insufficient quantity, or inadequately mixed. If the 
 cement is too hard, the pavement will have a tendency to crack 
 during cold weather; and if too soft, it will push out of place and 
 form w r aves under traffic. The quantity of cement needed varies 
 with the character of the sand a fine sand requires more cement 
 than a coarse one, and the proportion of cement must be varied to 
 suit the sand. When the ingredients are mixed inadequately, the 
 cement and the particles of sand are not brought into intimate 
 contact. Free oil or an excess of asphalt in the binder, making 
 it too rich, is liable to work up and be absorbed by the wearing 
 surface, and thus cause it to disintegrate. The mixture may be 
 chilled while being transported from the plant to the street. There 
 may be separation of the cement and sand, for if the distance from 
 
160 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 the plant to the street is great and there is any delay, some of the 
 cement may work to the bottom of the load, and when it is dumped, 
 there will be fat and lean spots, both of which are injurious. The 
 paving mixture may be laid upon a damp or dirty foundation. 
 There may be inadequate compression, for the importance of 
 thorough compaction is not appreciated always and this portion 
 of the work is slighted frequently. 
 
 (3) Natural Causes. All materials in nature continually 
 are undergoing change due to the action of the elements, and to 
 this asphalt is not an exception. Subjected to the action of heat, 
 all bitumens grow harder, and when the maximum degree of 
 hardness is attained, natural decay sets in so that under the com- 
 bined action of the elements, the material gradually rots and 
 disintegrates. 
 
 (4) Defective Foundation. By unequal settlement a weak 
 foundation will cause cracks and depressions in the surface which 
 will enlarge speedily under traffic. A porous foundation will per- 
 mit the ground water to rise, by capillary action, to the underside 
 of the wearing surface, where by freezing it will cause cracks and 
 thus provide access for surface water; non- watertight connection 
 between curbs and street fittings also furnishes a path for surface 
 water to reach the underside of the wearing surface, where the 
 presence of water causes rapid decay. 
 
 (5) Other Causes. Illuminating gas, escaping from leaking 
 pipes under the pavement causes disintegration of the asphalt. 
 Contraction, caused by the decrease in cementing power through 
 aging of the asphalt, results in cracks. Due to an excess of fluxing 
 material, there may be rolling and waving of the pavement under 
 traffic. Injury may be caused by fires made upon the pavement, 
 or by oil droppings from motor vehicles. 
 
 Sheet asphalt pavement usually is constructed under a contract 
 that provides for its maintenance during a period of years (five 
 or ten) by the contractor. Such a contract stipulates that the 
 condition of the pavement at the expiration of the maintenance 
 or guarantee period shall be as follows: Surface free from depres- 
 sions exceeding f -inch deep, when measured between any two points 
 4 feet apart on a line conforming substantially to the original con- 
 tour of the pavement. Free from cracks. Contain no disintegrated 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 161 
 
 material. Thickness not reduced more than f inch. Foundation 
 free from cracks and settlement. 
 
 Rock Asphalt Pavement. This is the name applied to pave- 
 ment made from the limestones and sandstones found naturally 
 impregnated or cemented with bitumen. They are prepared for 
 use by crushing and heating, and are used in their natural con- 
 dition or mixed with other materials. Deposits are found in many 
 parts of the United States and Europe. In Europe, rock asphalt 
 is the material most extensively used for paving, under the name 
 "asphalte". The European rock asphalts are impregnated very 
 uniformly with from 7 per cent to 14 per cent of asphalt, and readily 
 compact into a hard, smooth pavement which in frosty latitudes 
 becomes very slippery. The American rock asphalts are impreg- 
 nated irregularly with from 5 per cent to 30 per cent of asphalt. 
 Their use for paving is limited, chiefly owing to the cost of trans- 
 portation. 
 
 Asphalt Blocks. Formation. Asphalt paving blocks are formed 
 from a mixture of asphaltic cement and crushed stone in the pro- 
 portion of 8 or 12 per cent of cement to 88 or 92 per cent of stone. 
 The materials are heated to a temperature of about 300 Fahrenheit, 
 and mixed while hot in a suitable vessel. When the mixing is 
 complete, the material is placed in molds and subjected to heavy 
 pressure, after which the blocks are cooled suddenly by plunging 
 into cold water. The usual dimensions of the blocks are 4 inches 
 wide, 3 inches deep, and 12 inches long. 
 
 Foundation. The blocks usually are laid upon a concrete 
 foundation with a cushion coat of sand about J-inch thick. They 
 are laid with their lengths at right angles to the axis of the street, 
 and the longitudinal joints should be broken by a lap of at least 
 4 inches. The blocks then are rammed with hand hammers, or 
 are rolled with a light steam roller, the surface being covered 
 with clean, fine sand; no joint filling is used, as, under the action 
 of the sun and traffic, the blocks soon become cemented. 
 
 The advantages claimed for a pavement of asphalt blocks 
 over those for a continuous sheet of asphalt are: (1) that they can 
 be made at a factory located near the materials, whence they can 
 be transported to the place where they are to be used and can be 
 laid by ordinary paviors, whereas sheet pavements require special 
 
162 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 machinery and skilled labor; (2) that they are less slippery, owing 
 to the joints and the rougher surface due to the use of crushed stone. 
 
 minr mi 
 
 Fig. 99. Rake and Smoothing Irons Used in Laying Asphalt Pavement 
 Courtesy of Barber Asphalt Paving Company, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 
 
 Another Form. Another form of asphalt block, known as the 
 
 "Lueba" block, consists of a block 8J inches long, 4J inches wide, 
 
 ^ and 4 inches thick, with the lower 3 inches 
 
 '^EJ JB composed of Portland-cement concrete cov- 
 
 %^H^^^ ered with 1 inch of natural-rock asphalt; 
 
 | the two materials being joined under heavy 
 
 m^ hydraulic pressure. The blocks are laid on 
 
 a concrete foundation and the joints be- 
 
 ^^| lIpP tween them are filled with hydraulic-cement 
 
 grout. 
 
 Tools Employed in Construction of 
 Asphalt Pavements. The tools used in lay- 
 ing sheet-asphalt pavements comprise hand 
 rammers iron, rakes, smoothing irons, Fig. 
 99; pouring pots, Fig. 100; hand rollers, 
 either with or without a fire pot, Fig. 101 ; 
 
 Fig. 100. Pouring Pots Used 3 . . 
 
 with Asphalt Pavements and steam rollers, with or without pro vision 
 
 Courtesy of Barber Asphalt PI,' .IP n T^ i rvr rni 
 
 Paving company for heating the front roll, rig. 102. Ihese 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 1G3 
 
 rollers are different in construction, appearance, and weight from 
 those employed for compacting broken stone. The difference is 
 due to the different character of the work required. 
 
 Fig. 101. Hand Rollers Used in Laying Asphalt Pavements 
 Courtesy of Barber Asphalt Paving Company, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 
 
 
 Fig. 102. Small Road Roller Used in Laying Asphalt Pavements 
 Courtesy of Barber Asphalt Paving Company, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 
 
 The principal dimensions of the 5-ton roller are as follows; 
 
 Front roll or steering wheel, diameter 30 to 32 inches 
 
 Real roll or driving wheel, diameter 48 inches 
 
 Front roll, width 40 inches 
 
 Rear roll, width 40 inches 
 
 Length, extreme 14 feet 
 
 Height, extreme. . 7 to 8 feet 
 
 Water capacity 80 to 100 gallons 
 
 Coal capacity 200 pounds 
 
164 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS PAVEMENTS 
 
 Under this head will be described briefly the most notable 
 examples of pavements devised as substitutes for the recognized 
 standard types, and sometimes used where good materials are not 
 available, or where insufficient funds prevent their purchase, and 
 in some cases for the purpose of utilizing waste products. 
 
 Burnt Clay. In the Mississippi Valley, during the dry season, 
 the clay is cut from the roadway to a depth of about 2 feet, and 
 piled so as to form enclosures about 15 feet in diameter and 2 feet 
 high. After remaining so for about ten days to dry out, a fire is 
 made in the inclosure, more dry clay placed on top and the burning 
 proceeded with. The burnt clay after cooling, is relaid upon the 
 road, and then, being of a thoroughly porous nature, settles into a 
 dry, solid layer. 
 
 Straw. Clay roads have been improved by shaping and harrow- 
 ing the road, then applying a layer of wheat straw, which is 
 moistened with water, and cut and mixed with the clay by a disk 
 harrow. More straw is added and the operation repeated, then com- 
 pacted with a steam roller. The treatment is applied twice a year. 
 
 Oyster=Shell. The shells are spread on the road previously 
 shaped and rolled. They crush readily and, possessing a high 
 cementing quality, bind together to form a compact, smooth road 
 surface, but owing to their softness, they are quickly ground to 
 powder which is carried away readily by wind and rain water. 
 
 Chert. The siliceous material found overlying the red sand- 
 stone, which forms the covering of the red hematite iron ore in 
 some of the Southern States, is used for both street and road paving. 
 It is laid directly upon the earth surface or upon a prepared foun- 
 dation, sprinkled, and compacted in the same manner as w^ater- 
 bound macadam. 
 
 Slag. The slag produced in the manufacture of iron and steel 
 is used in various ways for paving. (1) It may be crushed to 
 the desired sizes and used in the same manner as broken stone, 
 laid in one or two courses, sprinkled and rolled. In some cases, 
 a binder composed of quicklime is used; in others, a waste sulphite 
 liquor is mixed with the water used for moistening it before rolling; 
 and in others, it is mixed with coal-tar or other bituminous cement 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 165 
 
 and formed into a pavement in the same manner as bituminous 
 macadam. The pavement called "tarmac", a large amount of 
 which has been used in England, is composed of slag, coal tar, 
 rosin, and Portland cement. (2) The slag may be formed into 
 blocks by casting in molds, which are used in the same manner as 
 stone blocks. In this form they are called "scoria" or "slag" blocks. 
 
 Clinker. Where crematories are employed for the destruction 
 of garbage about 33 per cent of the material remains after burning, 
 in the form of clinker. This is broken up and ground to a fine 
 powder, mixed with either a hydraulic or a bituminous cement, and 
 pressed into blocks and slabs. 
 
 Petrolithic. Petrolithic paving is made by applying a bitu- 
 minous oil to earth, sand, gravel, clay, or loam roads. The soil is 
 plowed to a depth of at least 6 inches, pulverized by harrowing, 
 and sprinkled with water. The bituminous oil is applied in one 
 or two coats at the rate of 1 gallon per square yard, the oil and soil 
 are mixed and compacted by a roller weighing 5000 pounds, the 
 surface of which is studded with spikes having a flat head measuring 
 2X3 inches, and on which account it is' named a "sheep's-foot" 
 roller. In operation, the spikes or feet are forced into the loose 
 soil and compress or pack it from the bottom upwards. After a 
 thorough mixing and tamping, the surface is shaped with a road 
 grader and rolled with a roller of the ordinary form. 
 
 Kleinpflaster. Kleinpflaster is the name given to a stone pave- 
 ment used in Germany for exceptionally heavy traffic, and used also 
 in England, under the name "durax". It is made of 3-inch cubes 
 of hard stone, cut by machinery, and laid in small segments of 
 circles. The stones are laid as close as possible and the joints are 
 filled with hydraulic-cement grout or bituminous filler. 
 
 Iron. Several experiments have been made with iron for 
 paving, but, while eminently durable, it was rough, noisy, and 
 slippery, and its use either alone or combined with other materials 
 has been abandoned. 
 
 Trackways. Formed of stone slabs, brick, concrete blocks, 
 steel, and other materials, trackways have been constructed at 
 various times for the purpose of reducing the resistance to traction. 
 Their use on an extensive scale, however, has been abandoned 
 except in Italy, Spain, and Germany. 
 
166 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 National Pavement. National pavement is composed of pul- 
 verized clay, loam, or ordinary soil, heated and mixed with liquid 
 bitumen. The mixture is spread to a depth of 2 or 3 inches upon 
 the surface of the compacted and drained natural soil and is com- 
 pressed by a power roller. 
 
 Fibered Asphalt Pavement. Fibered asphalt pavement is com- 
 posed of wood fiber, obtained as a waste product from the process 
 of extracting tannin and asphalt. The fiber is heated and mixed 
 with a predetermined quantity of asphalt. The hot mixture is run 
 into molds forming small blocks which are shipped to the place of 
 use. The blocks are there heated to a temperature of 275 F. in a 
 traveling heater that moves along the roadway and from which the 
 hot mixture emerges in a continuous stream 18 inches wide and is 
 deposited on the previously prepared foundation to a depth of 4 
 inches. After spreading, it is compressed to a thickness of 2 inches 
 with a power roller. 
 
 Westrumite. Westrumite is an asphalt cement temporarily 
 liquefied by emulsification. It is mixed cold with broken stone in 
 an ordinary concrete mixer, spread on the foundation, and com- 
 pacted by rolling. The evaporation of the vehicle leaves the asphalt 
 cement as the binder. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS STREET WORK 
 FOOTPATHS 
 
 A footpath or walk is simply a road under another name a 
 road for pedestrians instead of one for horses and vehicles. The 
 only difference that exists is in the degree of service required; but 
 the conditions of construction that render a road well adapted to 
 its object are very much the same as those required for a walk. 
 
 The effects of heavy loads such as traverse carriage-ways are 
 not felt upon footpaths; but the destructive action of w r ater and 
 frost is the same in either case, and the treatment to counteract 
 or resist these elements as far as practicable, and to produce per- 
 manency, must be the controlling idea in each case, and should 
 be carried out upon a common principle. It is not less essential 
 that a walk should be well adapted to its object than that a road 
 should be; and it is annoying to find it impassable or insecure and 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 167 
 
 in want of repair when it is needed for convenience or pleasure. 
 In point of economy, there is the same advantage in constructing 
 a footway skilfully and durably as there is in the case of a road. 
 
 Width. The width of footwalks (exclusive of the space occu- 
 pied by projections and shade trees) should be ample to accommodate 
 comfortably the number of people using them. In streets devoted 
 entirely to commercial purposes, the clear width should be at least 
 one-third the width of the carriage-way; in residential and suburban 
 streets, a very pleasing result can be obtained by making the walk 
 one-half the width of the roadway, and by devoting the greater 
 part to grass and shade trees. 
 
 Cross Slope. The surface of footpaths must be sloped so that 
 the surface water will readily flow to the gutters. This slope need 
 not be very great; J inch per foot will be sufficient. A greater slope 
 with a thin coating of ice upon it, becomes dangerous to pedestrians. 
 
 Foundation. As in the case of roadways, so with footpaths, 
 the foundation is of primary importance. Whatever material may 
 be used for the surface, if the foundation is weak and yielding, the 
 surface w r ill settle irregularly and become extremely objectionable, 
 if not dangerous, to pedestrians. 
 
 Surface. The requirements of a good covering for sidewalks are : 
 
 (1) It must be smooth but not slippery. 
 
 (2) It must absorb the minimum amount of water, so that it 
 may dry rapidly after rain. 
 
 (3) It must not be abrased easily. 
 
 (4) It must be of uniform quality throughout, so that it may 
 wear evenly. 
 
 (5) It must neither scale nor flake. 
 
 (6) Its texture must be such that dust will not adhere to it. 
 
 (7) It must be durable. 
 
 Materials. The materials used for footpaths are as follows: 
 stone, natural and artificial; wood; asphalt; brick; tar concrete; and 
 gravel. 
 
 Stones. Of the natural stones, sandstone (bluestone) and 
 granite are employed extensively. The bluestone, when well laid, 
 forms an excellent paving material. It is of compact texture, 
 absorbs water to a very limited extent, and hence soon dries after 
 rain; it has sufficient hardness to resist abrasion, and wears well 
 
168 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 without becoming excessively slippery. Granite, although exceed- 
 ingly durable, wears very slippery, and its surface has to be rough- 
 ened frequently. 
 
 Slabs, of whatever stone, must be of equal thickness throughout 
 their entire area; the edges must be dressed true to the square 
 for the whole thickness (edges must not be left feathered as shown 
 
 Fig. 103. Faulty Joint in Stone Sidewalk 
 
 in Fig. 103) ; and the slabs must be bedded solidly on the foundation 
 and the joints filled with cement mortar. Badly set or faultily 
 dressed flagstones are very unpleasant to walk over, especially 
 in rainy weather; the unevenness causes pedestrians to stumble, 
 and rocking stones squirt dirty water over their clothes. 
 
 Wood. Wood has been used largely in the form of planks; 
 it is cheap in first cost, but proves very expensive from the fact that 
 it lasts but a comparatively short time and requires constant repair 
 to keep it from becoming dangerous. 
 
 Asphalt. Asphalt forms an excellent footway pavement; it 
 is durable and does not wear slippery. 
 
 Brick. Brick of suitable quality, well and carefully laid on a 
 concrete foundation, makes an excellent footway pavement for 
 residential and suburban streets of large cities, and also for the main 
 streets of smaller towns. The bricks should be good qualities of 
 paving brick (ordinary building brick are unsuitable, as they soon 
 wear out and are broken easily). The bricks should be laid in 
 parallel rows on their edges, with their lengths at right angles to 
 the axis of the path. 
 
 Concrete. Concrete or artificial stone is used extensively as 
 a footway paving material. Its manufacture is the subject of 
 several patents, and numerous kinds are to be had in the market. 
 When manufactured of first-class materials and laid in a sub- 
 stantial manner, with proper provision against the action of 
 frost, artificial stone forms a durable, agreeable, and inexpensive 
 pavement. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 169 
 
 Concrete walks are formed in one or two courses. In one-course 
 work, the concrete is laid to a depth of 4 inches and tamped until 
 sufficient mortar flushes to the surface to permit the forming of a 
 smooth surface. In two-course work, the concrete for the base 
 is spread and tamped to a depth of 3 inches, the top or surface 
 course is spread upon the base before the latter has begun to set. 
 The top course has a thickness of about 1 inch, and it is tamped 
 and its surface is brought to the required plane by a straightedge 
 and by troweling. Expansion is provided for by transverse joints 
 extending the full depth of the concrete. The joints are placed 
 4 feet apart and are formed by placing across the side forms a J-inch 
 thick metal dividing strip, which is removed before the cement 
 sets so that the edges of the joint may be smoothed and rounded 
 with a suitable tool. 
 
 The area to be covered by the walk is excavated to a minimum 
 depth of 8 inches, or to such greater depth as the nature of the ground 
 may require to secure a solid foundation. The surface of the ground 
 so exposed is compacted by ramming, and a drainage course is 
 formed of broken stone, gravel, or steam-plant cinders, thoroughly 
 compacted by ramming, and its surface is brought to a plane parallel 
 to and 4 inches below the finished surface of the concrete. In 
 some situations it may be necessary to connect the drainage course 
 with the sewers, street drains, or side ditches, for the purpose of 
 furnishing an outlet for standing water; this is done by the use of 
 3-inch drain pipe placed where required. 
 
 The forms of steel or wood should be made substantially, and 
 left in place until the concrete is set hard. 
 
 Concrete walks fail from the use of improper materials and 
 defective workmanship, insufficient expansion joints, heaving and 
 cracking by frost, due to imperfect drainage, displacement and 
 cracks, due to settlement of the drainage course this latter 
 being frequent when cinders are used, as in time they are liable 
 to decompose and shrink in volume and thus allow the con- 
 crete to settle. In two-course \vork failure may be in respect 
 to flaking of the surface by the action of water and frost entering 
 between and separating the courses. The concrete should not be 
 laid during freezing weather, nor should frozen materials be used 
 in the work. 
 
170 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 CURBSTONES AND GUTTERS 
 
 Curbstones. Curbstones are employed for the outer side of 
 footways, to sustain the covering and to form ^the gutter. Their 
 upper edges are set flush with the footwalk pavement, so that the 
 water can flow over them into the gutters 
 
 Fig. 104. Typical Section Showing Stone Curb Eight Inches Thick 
 
 The disturbing forces which the curb has to resist are: (1) The 
 pressure of the earth behind it, which is frequently augmented by 
 piles of merchandise, building materials, etc. This pressure tends 
 to overturn it, break it transversely, or move it bodily on its base. 
 (2) The pressure due to the expansion of freezing earth behind 
 
 
 Fig. 105. Typical Section Showing Stone Curb Five Inches Thick 
 
 and beneath the curb. This force is most frequent where the side- 
 walk is sodded partly and the ground accordingly is moist. Suc- 
 cessive freezing and thawing of the earth behind the curb will occasion 
 a succession of thrusts forward, which, if the curb be of faulty 
 design, will cause it to incline several degrees from the vertical. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 171 
 
 (3) The concussions and abrasions caused by traffic. To withstand 
 the destructive effect of wheels, curbs are faced with iron; and a 
 concrete curb with a rounded edge of steel has been patented and 
 used to some extent. Fires built in the gutters deface and seriously 
 injure the curb. Posts and trees set too near the curb, tend to 
 break, displace, and destroy it. 
 
 The use of drain tiles under the curb is a subject of much dif- 
 ference of opinion among engineers. Where the subsoil contains 
 water naturally, or is likely to receive it from outside the curb lines, 
 the use of drains is of decided benefit; but great care must be exer- 
 cised in jointing the draintiles, lest the soil shall be loosened and 
 removed, causing the curb to drop out of alignment. 
 
 The materials employed for curbing are the natural stones 
 as granite, sandstone (bluestone), etc.; artificial stone fire clay, 
 and cast iron. 
 
 The dimensions of curbstones vary considerably in different 
 localities and according to the width of the footpaths; the wider the 
 path, the wider should be the curb. However, it should be never 
 less than 8 inches deep, nor narrower than 4 inches. Depth is 
 necessary to prevent the curb's turning over toward the gutter. It 
 never should be in smaller lengths than 3 feet. The top surface 
 should be beveled off to conform to the slope of the footpath. The 
 front face should be hammer-dressed for a depth of about 6 inches, 
 in order that there may be a smooth surface visible against the 
 gutter. The back for 3 inches from the top also should be dressed, 
 so that the flagging or other paving may butt fair against it. The 
 end joints should be cut a true square the full thickness of the stone 
 at the top, and so much below the top as will be exposed; the remain- 
 ing portion of the depth and bottom should be squared roughly, 
 and the bottom should be fairly parallel to the top. (See Figs. 104 
 and 105.) 
 
 Combination Curb and Gutter. Concrete curb and gutter 
 combined is constructed by placing the concrete in suitable forms. 
 The concrete should be handled so as to prevent the separation 
 of the stone and mortar, and when placed should be tamped well 
 to bring the mortar to the surface and make complete contact with 
 the forms. The corner formed by the top and face surfaces is 
 rounded to a radius of about 1J inches; sometimes this corner is 
 
172 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 formed of a steel bar put in place before the concrete is laid and 
 anchored by metal strips spaced about 3 feet apart. Expansion 
 joints are formed at distances of 10 or 12 feet. The remarks made 
 under concrete walks regarding foundation, drainage, failure, etc., 
 apply also to concrete curbs. 
 
 STREET CLEANING 
 
 The cleaning of streets is practiced for the purpose of protecting 
 the health of the neighboring residents and for the comfort of the 
 users. It is of comparatively recent development, and is ren- 
 dered possible only by the use of hard pavements. The materials 
 
 Fig. 106. Typical Machine Street Sweeper 
 Courtesy of Acme Road Machinery Company, Frankfort, New York 
 
 to be removed from the streets consist of animal droppings, material 
 worn from the pavement, materials dropped from vehicles, waste 
 from building construction, miscellaneous materials swept from 
 houses, stores, and factories, and the accumulation of snow during 
 winter. 
 
 Cleaning Methods. The local conditions and character of the 
 traffic and pavement determine the methods to be employed and 
 the intervals for cleaning the streets. The methods employed are: 
 sweeping, either by hand or by machine brooms; and flushing with 
 water the work being performed either during the day or the 
 night, by large gangs at night, and by means of a patrol system 
 during the day. Fig. 106 shows one of the machine sweepers used. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE XV 
 Rate and Cost of Street Cleaning 
 
 173 
 
 PAVEMENT 
 
 APPROXIMATE 
 SURFACE SWEPT 
 PER MAN 
 (sq. yds. per hr.) 
 
 APPROXIMATE 
 DIRT FROM DAILY 
 SWEEPING 
 (cu. yds. per 
 1000 sq. yds.) 
 
 AVERAGE COST 
 PER EACH 
 CLEANING 
 (cents per sq. 
 
 yd.) 
 
 
 (Wet) 
 
 (Dry) 
 
 (Mia.) 
 
 (Max.) 
 
 
 Asphalt 
 
 1000 
 
 1200 
 
 .007 
 
 .040 
 
 .0030 
 
 Granite-block 
 
 750 
 
 1000 
 
 .015 
 
 .024 
 
 .0050 
 
 Macadam (water-bound) 
 
 700 
 
 
 .100 
 
 .350 
 
 .0106 
 
 Wood 
 
 
 
 .070 
 
 .200 
 
 .0070 
 
 Brick 
 
 
 
 
 
 .0034 
 
 In the hand-cleaning method by day patrol, each man is fur- 
 nished with a push broom, shovel, and can carrier in which to place 
 the refuse, and has a certain section of street to clean each day. 
 The day patrol sometimes is supplemented by a large gang working 
 during the night. When machine brooms are employed they usually 
 are operated at night and are supplemented by the patrol system 
 during the day. As to which is the most economical, it will depend 
 upon the cost of labor and the condition of the pavements; on pave- 
 ments covered with ruts and depressions machine brooms are 
 ineffective. 
 
 The approximate costs of the various methods of street cleaning 
 per 1000 sq. yds. are: 
 
 Sweeping (hand) $0.281 
 
 Sweeping (machine) . 317 
 
 Flushing (hand-hose) . 319 
 
 Flushing (machine) . 721 
 
 The average cost of supervision varies from .011 cent to 34 
 cents per mile. 
 
 The amount of surface cleaned by a machine broom depends 
 upon the width of the broom, the power of the horses or other 
 motive power, gradient, and condition of the surface. The wider 
 the broom the less will be the cost. The average speed of travel 
 is about 1J miles per hour. 
 
 In Table XV are indicated the amount of surface which an 
 average man will sweep per hour, depending upon the condition 
 of the pavement dry, wet, or muddy; relative amount of dirt 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 175 
 
 produced by the different pavements, if swept daily; and the average 
 cost of cleaning different pavements. 
 
 Removal of Snow. The methods employed for keeping roads 
 and streets passable during the period of snowfall varies according 
 to the climatic conditions. In localities subject to heavy falls 
 of snow, and continuous low temperature that retards the melting 
 of the snow until spring, two methods are followed: (1) a narrow 
 track is opened by a snowplow, through the center of the road, 
 the snow being formed into long, narrow heaps on each side; 
 (2) the snow is not removed, but is compacted by rolling with a 
 light-weight wood or metal roller, Fig. 107. In localities having 
 light falls and in the larger cities, the snow is pushed by plows or 
 rotary brooms toward the gutters from where it is loaded into 
 vehicles, hauled to a natural waterway and dumped, or in the 
 absence of this it is placed in vacant lots and in some cases it is 
 disposed of by dumping into the sewers through the manholes, 
 but this must be done carefully, as there is liability of choking the 
 sewer by the snow's consolidating. Light falls may be disposed 
 of by the application of a stream of water to the surface of the 
 street thereby washing the snow into the sewer. Many machines 
 have been devised for melting the snow by the application of steam, 
 hot air, etc., but none of them have been successful economically. 
 In some cities the snow is melted by an application of rock salt 
 which produces a thawing action when mixed with the snow by 
 the traffic, the slushy mixture so formed is swept to the gutters 
 by machine brooms and washed into the sewers by a stream of 
 water from the hydrants. Objection is made to this method on 
 account of the intense cold produced and its injurious effect upon 
 the feet of pedestrians and on the hoofs of horses. 
 
 In order to cause the minimum of inconvenience to traffic it 
 is necessary that the snow be removed from the streets as quickly 
 as possible, therefore, it is customary, before the arrival of winter, 
 to lay out the method and organization required and to make arrange- 
 ments for the quick mobilization of the force needed for its removal. 
 To accomplish this the city is divided into districts, in each of which 
 there is established a headquarters and depot stocked with the 
 necessary tools to execute the work in that district, and to which 
 the laborers report when the snow commences to fall. 
 
176 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 Street Sprinkling. Streets and roads are sprinkled with water 
 for the purpose of abating dust and cooling the air. While water- 
 bound macadam and earth surfaces must be sprinkled to abate 
 the dust, a stone-block, brick, asphalt, or wood pavement will not 
 require sprinkling if thoroughly cleansed and kept clean. On 
 unclean and badly maintained pavements, sprinkling with water 
 as usually performed converts the fine dust into a slime which renders 
 all smooth pavements slippery, and in warm weather it becomes a 
 prolific breeding place for disease germs, it clings to the feet and 
 clothing of pedestrians, and, with its accompanying germs, is carried 
 into buildings and dwellings. 
 
 The average cost of sprinkling per square yard is $0.009. 
 
 The systems followed for executing the work of street cleaning, 
 snow removal, and sprinkling are: (1) by contract where the con- 
 tractor furnishes all the tools and labor; (2) by contract for the 
 labor only, the city furnishing the tools and machinery ; (3) by the 
 city, with its own staff and machinery. 
 
 SELECTING THE PAVEMENT 
 
 The problem of selecting the best pavement for any particular 
 case is a local one, not only for each city, but also for each of the various 
 parts into which the city is imperceptibly divided; and it involves so 
 many elements that the nicest balancing of the relative values for each 
 kind of pavement is required in arriving at a correct conclusion. 
 
 In some localities, the proximity of one or more paving materials 
 determines the character of the pavement; while in other cases a 
 careful investigation may be required in order to select the most 
 suitable material. Local conditions always should be considered; 
 hence it is not possible to lay down any fixed rule as to what material 
 makes the best pavement. 
 
 Qualifications. The qualities essential to a good pavement 
 may be stated as follows : 
 
 (1) It should be impervious. 
 
 (2) It should afford good foothold for horses and adhesion 
 for motor vehicles. 
 
 (3) It should be hard and durable, so as to resist wear and 
 disintegration. 
 
 (4) It should be adapted to every grade. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 177 
 
 (5) It should suit every class of traffic. 
 
 (6) It should offer the minimum resistance to traction. 
 
 (7) It should be noiseless. 
 
 (8) It should yield neither dust nor mud. 
 
 (9) It should be cleaned easily. 
 
 (10) It should be cheap. 
 
 Interests Affected. Of the above requirements, numbers (2), 
 (4), (5), and (6) affect the traffic and determine the cost of haulage 
 by the limitations of loads, speed, and wear and tear of horses and 
 vehicles. If the surface is tough or the foothold bad, the weight 
 of the load a horse can draw is decreased, thus necessitating the 
 making of more trips or the employment of more horses and vehicles 
 to move a given weight. A defective surface necessitates a reduction 
 in the speed of movement and a consequent loss of time; it increases 
 the wear of horses, thus decreasing their life service and lessening 
 the value of their current services ; it also increases the cost of main- 
 taining vehicles and harness. 
 
 Requirements, numbers (7), (8), and (9), affect the occupiers 
 of adjacent premises, who suffer from the effect of dust and noise; 
 they also affect the owners of said premises, whose income from 
 rents is diminished where these disadvantages exist. Numbers 
 (3) and (10) affect the taxpayers alone first, as to the length of 
 time during which the covering remains serviceable; and second, 
 as to the amount of the annual repairs. Number (1) affects the 
 adjacent occupiers principally on hygienic grounds. Numbers (7) 
 and (8) affect both traffic and occupiers. 
 
 Problem Involved in Selection. The problem involved in the 
 selection of the most suitable pavement consists of the following 
 factors: (1) adaptability; (2) desirability; (3) serviceability; (4) com- 
 parative safety; (5) durability; (6) cost. 
 
 Adaptability. The best pavement for any given roadway will 
 depend altogether on local circumstances. Pavements must be 
 adapted to the class of traffic that will use them. The pavement 
 suitable for a road through an agricultural district will not be suit- 
 able for the streets of a manufacturing center ; nor will the covering 
 suitable for heavy traffic be suitable for a pleasure drive or for a 
 residential district. 
 
 General experience indicates the relative fitness of the several 
 
178 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE XVI 
 Resistance to Traction on Different Pavements 
 
 
 TRACTIVE RESISTANCE 
 
 
 Lb. per Ton 
 
 Fraction of the Load 
 
 Sheet-asphalt 
 Brick 
 
 30 to 70 
 15 to 40 
 
 eV to - 3 \, 
 
 Cobblestone 
 
 50 to 100 
 
 40 tO 2 ] o 
 
 Stone-block 
 
 30 to 80 
 
 eV to & 
 
 Rectangular wood-block 
 
 30 to 50 
 
 eV to 4*0 
 
 Round wood-block 
 
 40 to 80 
 
 s 1 ,) to 2 ' 5 
 
 materials as follows: for country roads, suburban streets, and pleasure 
 drives broken stone; for streets having heavy and constant traffic 
 rectangular blocks of stone, laid on a concrete foundation, with 
 the joints filled with bituminous or Portland-cement grout; for 
 streets devoted to retail trade, and where comparative noiselessness 
 is essential asphalt, wood, or brick. More recent experience 
 indicates that concrete, when properly laid and reinforced at neces- 
 sary points, may be employed to advantage for any pavement, 
 both as base and as wearing surface. 
 
 Desirability. The desirability of a pavement is its possession 
 of qualities which make it satisfactory to the people using and 
 seeing it. Between two pavements alike in cost and durability, 
 people will have preferences arising from the condition of their 
 health, personal prejudices, and various other intangible influences, 
 causing them to select one rather than the other in their respective 
 streets. Such selections often are made against the demonstrated 
 economies of the case, and usually in ignorance of them. Whenever 
 one kind of pavement is more economical and satisfactory to use 
 than is any other, there should not be any difference of opinion 
 about securing it, either as a new pavement or in the replacement 
 of an old one. 
 
 The economic desirability of pavements is governed by the 
 ease of movement over them, and is measured by the number of 
 horses or pounds of tractive force required to move over them a 
 given weight usually 1 ton. The resistance offered to traction 
 by different pavements is shown in Table XVI. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 179 
 
 Serviceability. The serviceability of a pavement is its quality 
 of fitness for use. This quality is measured by the expense caused 
 to the traffic using it namely, the wear and tear of horses and 
 vehicles, loss of time, etc. No statistics are available from which 
 to deduce the actual cost of wear and tear. 
 
 The serviceability of any pavement in great measure depends 
 upon the amount of foothold afforded by it to the horses provided, 
 however, that its surface be not so rough as to absorb too large a 
 percentage of the tractive energy required to move a given load 
 over it. Cobblestones afford excellent foothold, and for this reason 
 are largely employed by horse-car companies for paving between 
 the rails; but the resistance of their surface to motion requires 
 the expenditure of about 40 pounds of tractive energy to move 
 a load of 1 ton. Asphalt affords the least foothold ; but the tractive 
 force required to overcome the resistance it offers to motion is 
 only about 30 pounds per ton. 
 
 Comparative Safety. The comparison of pavements in respect 
 to safety, is the average distance traveled before a horse falls. The 
 materials affording the best foothold for horses are as follows, 
 stated in the order of their merit: 
 
 (1) Earth, dry and compact. 
 
 (2) Gravel. 
 
 (3) Broken stone (macadam). 
 
 (4) Wood. 
 
 (5) Sandstone and brick. 
 
 (6) Asphalt. 
 
 (7) Granite blocks. 
 
 , ^ Durability. The durability of pavement is that quality which 
 determines the length of time during which it is serviceable, and 
 does not relate to the length of time it has been down. The only 
 measure of durability of a pavement is the amount of traffic tonnage 
 it will bear before it becomes so worn that the cost of replacing it 
 is less than the expense incurred by its use. 
 
 As a pavement is a construction, it necessarily follows that there 
 is a vast difference between the durability of the pavement and the 
 durability of the materials of which it is made. Iron is eminently 
 durable; but, as a paving material, it is a failure. 
 
 The durability of a paving material will vary considerably with 
 
180 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE XVII 
 / Terms of Life of Various Pavements 
 
 MATERIALS 
 
 TERMS OF LIFE 
 (Years) 
 
 Granite-block 
 
 12 to 30 
 
 Sandstone 
 
 6 to 12 
 
 Asphalt 
 Wood 
 
 10 to 14 
 
 7 to 15 
 
 Limestone 
 
 1 to 3 
 
 Brick 
 
 5 to 15 
 
 Macadam 
 
 5 to ? 
 
 the condition of cleanliness observed. One inch of overlying dirt 
 will protect the pavement most effectually from abrasion, and 
 prolong its life indefinitely. But the dirt is expensive; it injures 
 apparel and merchandise, and is the cause of sickness and discom- 
 fort. In the comparison of different pavements, no traffic should 
 be credited to the dirty one. The life or durability of different 
 pavements under like conditions of traffic and maintenance, may 
 be taken as shown in Table XVII. 
 
 Cost. First cost or the cost of construction, is largely controlled 
 by the locality of the place, its proximity to the particular material 
 used, and the character of the foundation. The question of cost 
 is the one which usually interests taxpayers, and is problably the 
 greatest stumblingblock in the attainment of good roadways. The first 
 cost usually is charged against the property abutting on the highway 
 to be improved. The result is that the average property owner 
 always is anxious for a pavement that costs little, because he must 
 pay for it, not caring for the fact that cheap pavements soon wear 
 out and become a source of endless annoyance and additional expense. 
 Thus false ideas of economy usually have stood, and undoubtedly 
 always will stand to some extent, in the way of realizing that the 
 best is the cheapest. 
 
 The pavement which has cost the most is not always the best; 
 nor is that which cost the least the cheapest; the one which is truly 
 the cheapest is the one which makes the most profitable returns 
 in proportion to the amount expended upon it. No doubt there 
 is a limit of cost to go beyond which would produce no practical 
 benefit; but it always will be found more economical to spend enough 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 181 
 
 to secure the best results, and this always will cost less in the long 
 run. One dollar well spent is many times more effective than one- 
 half of the amount injudiciously expended in the hopeless effort 
 to reach sufficiently good results. The cheaper work may look as 
 well as the more expensive, for a time, but very soon may have 
 to be done over again. 
 
 Economic Benefit. The economic benefit of a good roadway 
 is comprised in the following: its cheaper maintenance, the greater 
 facility it offers for traveling, thus reducing the cost of transporta- 
 tion; the lower cost of repairs to vehicles, and less wear of horses, 
 thus increasing their term of serviceability and enhancing the value 
 of their present service ; the saving of time ; and the ease and comfort 
 afforded to those using the roadway. 
 
 Relative Economies. The relative economies of pavements 
 whether of the same kind in different condition, or of different 
 kinds in like good condition are determined sufficiently by summing 
 their cost under the following headings of account: 
 
 (1) Annual interest upon first cost and sinking fund. 
 
 (2) Annual expense for maintenance. 
 
 (3) Annual cost for cleaning and sprinkling. 
 
 (4) Annual cost for service and use. 
 
 (5) Annual cost for consequential damages. 
 
 Interest on First Cost. The first cost of a pavement, like any 
 other permanent investment, is measurable for purposes of comparison 
 by the amount of annual interest on the sum expended. Thus, 
 assuming the worth of money to be 4 per cent, a pavement costing 
 $4 per square yard entails an annual interest loss or tax of $0.16 
 per square yard. 
 
 Cost of Maintenance. Under this head must be included all 
 outlays for repairs and renewals which are made from the time 
 when the pavement is new and at its best to a time subsequent, 
 when, by any treatment, it is put again in equally good condition. 
 The gross sum so derived, divided by the number of years which 
 elapse between the two dates, gives an annual average cost for 
 maintenance. 
 
 Maintenance means the keeping of the pavement in a condition 
 practically as good as when first laid. The cost will vary con- 
 siderably depending not only upon the material and the manner in 
 
182 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 which it is constructed, but upon the condition of cleanliness 
 observed, and the quantity and quality of the traffic using the 
 pavement. 
 
 The prevailing opinion that no pavement is a good one unless, 
 when once laid, it will take care of itself, is erroneous; there is no 
 such pavement. All pavements are being worn constantly by 
 traffic and by the action of the atmosphere; and if any defects 
 which appear are not repaired quickly, the pavements soon become 
 unsatisfactory and are destroyed. To keep them in good repair, 
 incessant attention is necessary, and is consistent with economy. 
 Yet claims are made that particular pavements cost little or nothing 
 for repairs, simply because repairs in these cases are not made, 
 while any one can see the need of them. 
 
 Cost of Cleaning and Sprinkling. Any pavement, to be con- 
 sidered as properly cared for, must be kept dustless and clean. 
 While circumstances legitimately determine in many cases that 
 streets must be cleaned at daily, weekly, or semiweekly intervals, 
 the only admissible condition for the purpose of analysis of street 
 expenses must be that of like requirements in both or all cases 
 subjected to comparison. 
 
 The cleaning of pavements, as regards both efficiency and cost, 
 depends (1) upon the character of the surface; (2) upon the nature 
 of the materials of which the pavements are composed. Block 
 pavements present the greatest difficulty; the joints can never 
 be perfectly cleaned. The order of merit as regards facility of cleans- 
 ing, is: (1) asphalt, (2) concrete, (3) brick, (4) stone, (5) wood, 
 (6) macadam. 
 
 Cost of Service and Use. The annual cost for service is made 
 up by combining several items of cost incidental to the use of the 
 pavement for traffic for instance, the limitation of the speed of 
 movement, as in cases where a bad pavement causes slow driving 
 and consequent loss of time ; or cases where the condition of a pave- 
 ment limits the weight of the load which a horse can haul, and so 
 compels the making of more trips or the employment of more 
 horses and vehicles; or cases where conditions are such as to 
 cause greater wear and tear of vehicles, of equipment, and of 
 horses. If a vehicle is run 1500 miles in a year, and its main- 
 tenance cost $30 a year, then the cost of its maintenance per 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 183 
 
 mile traveled is 2 cents. If the value of a team's time is, say 
 $1 for the legitimate time taken in going 1 mile with a load, 
 and in consequence of bad roads it takes double that time, then 
 the cost to traffic from having to use that mile of bad roadway is 
 $1 for each load. The same reasoning applies to circumstances 
 where the weight of the load has to be reduced so as to neces- 
 sitate the making of more than one trip. Again, bad pavements 
 lessen not only the life service of horses, but also the value of their 
 current service. 
 
 Cost for Consequential Damages. The determination of conse- 
 quential damages arising from the use of defective or unsuitable 
 pavements, involves the consideration of a wide array of diverse 
 circumstances. Rough-surfaced pavements, when in their best 
 condition, afford a lodgment for organic matter composed largely 
 of the urine and excrement of the animals employed upon the road- 
 way. In warm and damp weather, these matters undergo putre- 
 factive fermentation, and become the most efficient agency for 
 generating and disseminating noxious vapors and disease germs, 
 now recognized as the cause of a large part of the ills afflicting 
 mankind. Pavements formed of porous materials are objectionable 
 on the same, if not even stronger, grounds. 
 
 Pavements productive of dust and mud are objectionable, 
 and especially so on streets devoted to retail trade. If this par- 
 ticular disadvantage be appraised at so small a sum per lineal foot 
 of frontage as- $1.50 per month, or 6 cents per day, it exceeds the 
 cost of the best quality of pavement free from these disadvantages. 
 
 Rough-surfaced pavements are noisy under traffic and insuffer- 
 able to nervous invalids, and much nervous sickness is attributable 
 to them. To all persons interested in nervous invalids, this damage 
 from noisy pavements is rated as being far greater than would 
 be the cost of substituting the best quality of noiseless pavement; 
 but there are, under many circumstances, specific financial losses, 
 measurable in dollars and cents, dependent upon the use of rough, 
 noisy pavements. They reduce the rental value of buildings and 
 offices situated upon streets so paved offices devoted to pursuits 
 wherein exhausting brain work is required. In such locations, 
 quietness is almost indispensable, and no question about the cost 
 of a noiseless pavement weighs against its possession. 
 
184 
 
 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 TABLE XVIII 
 Comparative Rank of Pavements 
 
 CHARACTERISTICS 
 
 VARIETY 
 
 
 
 Asphalt (sheet) 
 
 
 
 
 Asphalt (block) 
 
 
 
 
 
 Concrete 
 
 
 Value 
 
 
 
 
 Macadam (bituminous) 
 
 Qualities 
 
 (per 
 
 
 
 
 
 Macadam (water-bound) 
 
 
 cent) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Brick 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Granite 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sandstone 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wood) 
 
 Low tractive resistance 
 
 20 
 
 20.C 
 
 19.0 
 
 18.0 
 
 19.0 
 
 ll.G 
 
 18.0 
 
 12.C 
 
 14.0 
 
 20.0 
 
 Service on grades 
 
 10 
 
 3.0 
 
 3.0 
 
 7.0 
 
 4.0 
 
 8.0 
 
 9.0 
 
 10.0 
 
 10.0 
 
 2.0 
 
 Non-slipperiness 
 
 5 
 
 1.5 
 
 2.5 
 
 4.0 
 
 2.5 
 
 4.5 
 
 3.5 
 
 3.5 
 
 5.0 
 
 2.0 
 
 Favorableness to travel 
 
 5 
 
 5.0 
 
 4.5 
 
 3.5 
 
 4.0 
 
 4.5 
 
 3.5 
 
 3.5 
 
 4.0 
 
 4.5 
 
 Sanitariness 
 
 10 
 
 10.0 
 
 9.0 
 
 7.0 
 
 8.0 
 
 3.0 
 
 8.0 
 
 6.0 
 
 7.0 
 
 9.0 
 
 Noiselessness 
 
 3 
 
 2.5 
 
 2.5 
 
 2.0 
 
 2.5 
 
 2.5 
 
 1.5 
 
 1.0 
 
 1.5 
 
 3.0 
 
 Minimum dust 
 
 3 
 
 2.5 
 
 2.5 
 
 2.0 
 
 2.0 
 
 1.0 
 
 2.0 
 
 1.5 
 
 2.0 
 
 2.0 
 
 Ease of cleaning 
 
 5 
 
 5.0 
 
 5.0 
 
 3.5 
 
 4.0 
 
 1.0 
 
 3.5 
 
 1.5 
 
 1.5 
 
 5.0 
 
 Acceptability 
 
 4 
 
 3.5 
 
 3.5 
 
 2.5 
 
 3.0 
 
 1.5 
 
 2.5 
 
 2.0 
 
 2.5 
 
 4.0 
 
 Durability 
 
 15 
 
 7.5 
 
 8.5 
 
 6.0 
 
 3.0 
 
 1.5 
 
 10.0 
 
 15.0 
 
 14.0 
 
 11.5 
 
 Ease of maintenance 
 
 5 
 
 3.5 
 
 4.0 
 
 3.0 
 
 3.0 
 
 2.5 
 
 4.0 
 
 4.5 
 
 5.0 
 
 5.0 
 
 Cheapness (first cost) 
 
 10 
 
 4.5 
 
 4.0 
 
 5.0 
 
 7.5 
 
 10.0 
 
 4.0 
 
 3.0 
 
 3.5 
 
 3.0 
 
 Low annual cost 
 
 5 
 
 1.5 
 
 2.5 
 
 3.0 
 
 3.5 
 
 1.0 
 
 4.5 
 
 5.0 
 
 5.0 
 
 5.0 
 
 Totals. . . . 
 
 100 
 
 70.0 
 
 70.5 
 
 66.5 
 
 66.0 
 
 52.0 
 
 74.0 
 
 68.5 
 
 75.0 
 
 76.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Approximate first cost 
 (dollars per sq. yd.) 
 
 2.30 
 
 2.65 
 
 1.85 
 
 1.35 
 
 1.00 
 
 2.65 
 
 3.25 
 
 3.00 
 
 3.45 
 
 When an investigator has done the best he can to determine 
 such a summary of costs of a pavement, he may divide the amount 
 of annual tonnage of the street traffic by the amount of annual 
 costs, and know what number of tons of traffic are borne for each 
 cent of the average annual cost, which is the crucial test for any 
 comparison, as follows: 
 
 (1) Annual interest upon first cost and sinking fund $ 
 
 (2) Average annual expense for maintenance and renewal . . 
 
 (3) Annual cost for custody (sprinkling and cleaning) ...... 
 
 (4) Annual cost for service and use 
 
 (5) Annual cost for consequential damages 
 
 Amount of average annual cost 
 
 Annual tonnage of traffic 
 
 Tons of traffic for each cent of cost 
 
 Gross Cost of Pavements. Since the cost of a pavement 
 depends upon the material of which it is formed, the width of the 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 185 
 
 roadway, the extent and nature of the traffic, and the condition 
 of repair and cleanliness in which it is maintained, it follows that 
 in no two streets is the endurance or the cost the same, and the 
 difference between the highest and lowest periods qf endurance 
 and amount of cost is very considerable. 
 
 Comparative Rank of Pavements. In Table XVIII is given 
 the rank of the various pavements in percentage, prorated from 
 the values assigned in the first column to the desired qualities. 
 The pavement ranking first in any given quality is given the 
 full value for that quality, the others grading down from this 
 value according to the extent to which they possess the desired 
 quality. An examination of the table shows macadam to be the 
 cheapest; least durable, and most difficult to maintain and cleanse; 
 rather favorable to travel; comparatively low in sanitariness; and 
 high in annual cost. While the table may be used as an aid in 
 determining the most suitable pavement according to the factors 
 that are susceptible of a numerical value, the values assigned must 
 be modified by local conditions; first cost will necessarily vary in 
 different localities, and certain factors will be more important in 
 one locality than another. 
 
 Specifications. A specification or detailed description of the 
 various works to be carried out always is attached to a contract, 
 and is prepared before estimates are called for. The prominent 
 points that are essential to the production of a specification that 
 will fulfill its purpose properly, are: (1) description of the work; 
 (2) extent of the work; (3) quality of the materials; (4) tests for 
 the materials; (5) delivery of the materials; (6) character of the 
 workmanship; (7) manner of executing the work. 
 
 Attention to these points and a clear and accurate description 
 of each detail (leaving nothing to be imagined) not only will 
 contribute materially to the rapid and efficient execution of the 
 work, but will avoid any future misunderstanding. Every item 
 of the work should be allotted a separate clause, for confusion 
 must ensue when a single clause includes descriptions of several 
 matters. 
 
 As a rule it is undesirable to insert in specifications any dimen- 
 sions or weights that can be shown on the drawings. However, 
 when it is necessary to insert them, words should be used instead 
 
186 HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 
 
 of numerals; the use of numerals, and particularly decimal numbers, 
 should be avoided, as there is a risk of having them set up incorrectly 
 by the typesetter and overlooked in the proofreading. When a 
 numeral is used it should be followed by the word or words indicat- 
 ing the numeral, placing the numeral in parenthesis. 
 
 Brevity, so far as it is consistent with completeness, should 
 prevail, but the word "et cetera" should be excluded rigidly, and 
 the matters covered by it should be defined clearly. Neither should 
 important points of the work be dismissed with the direction that 
 "the w r ork shall be done to the satisfaction of the engineer". A 
 direction of this kind usually implies that the engineer does not 
 know what he wants, and therefore leaves the matter to the superior 
 knowledge of the contractor an attitude not very creditable to 
 the former. The only really legitimate use of this phrase is in a 
 general clause referring to the whole of the work. 
 
 The specifying of impracticable sizes of materials must be 
 avoided as it causes unnecessary discussion and frequently leads 
 to a charge for "extras". 
 
 A clause or phrase permitting the furnishing of alternative 
 materials or workmanship should be excluded, because such per- 
 mission affords ground for dispute and difference of opinion. On 
 the other hand, specifying that certain articles manufactured by 
 a particular firm shall be used should be avoided, as it suggests 
 unfairness on the part of the engineer, and may create the idea 
 that his selection is not without profit to himself. 
 
 With regard to the actual methods of carrying out the work, 
 the contractor should not be tied to any particular means of effecting 
 the required end, unless special circumstances require it, for, pro- 
 vided the materials and workmanship are satisfactory, it is better 
 to allow the contractor to use his own discretion as to the manner 
 of producing the required result. 
 
 While the standard and proper tests for the materials always 
 should be stipulated, yet if they are carried to an extreme degree, 
 as frequently happens, they defeat their own object. When it 
 becomes impossible to carry out certain unreasonable demands, 
 the alternative is to evade them as much as possible; and it must 
 be borne in mind that the more stringent the demand, the greater 
 the difficulty in enforcing it. 
 
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 187 
 
 Contracts. A good, clear, and comprehensive contract is a 
 difficult thing to write, but it should be "common sense" from 
 beginning to end, and should be the joint production of both engi- 
 neering and legal ability, neither sacrificing the one feature to the 
 other. 
 
 The stipulations of the contract form the legal part of the 
 document and are distinct from the technical description of the 
 work to be done. The essential points are: (1-) time of commence- 
 ment; (2) time of completion; (3) manner and times of payment; 
 (4) prices for which the work is to be performed; (5) measurements; 
 (6) damages for noncompletion; (7) protection of persons and 
 property during the prosecution of work; (8) such special stip- 
 ulations as may be required for the particular work that is being 
 contracted for. 
 
 It should be borne in mind that the contract and specifications 
 when duly signed by the parties interested, is a legal document, 
 which must be produced in court in the event of a dispute arising, 
 therefore, it is of the utmost importance that it be written clearly 
 in simple language, the clauses being arranged in logical sequence, 
 and the descriptions made exact and complete without being need- 
 lessly verbose. 
 
 High-sounding phrases, and duplication of statements or infor- 
 mation, should be avoided as tending to confusion. Specifications 
 are seldom judged by literary standards of excellence, therefore, 
 words may be repeated again and again if they express the meaning 
 of the writer more clearly and forcibly than an alternative would do. 
 
 In the case of a lengthy contract and specification, a complete 
 index with the clause and page numbers will be found an aid to 
 finding quickly any required subject; cross references may some- 
 times be introduced with advantage. 
 
INDEX. 
 
INDEX 
 
 Asphalt pavements 153 
 
 asphalt blocks 161 
 
 failure ~ 159 
 
 foundation 157 
 
 laying 155 
 
 qualifications 157 
 
 rock asphalt 161 
 
 sheet-asphalt 153 
 
 tools employed in constructing __ __ 162 
 
 Axle friction - - 11 
 
 B 
 
 Bituminous-macadam 99 
 
 amiesite 103 
 
 asphaltic petroleums 105 
 
 bitulithic. . 103 
 
 bituminous materials, definitions of 104 
 
 bituminous materials, tests for 106 
 
 cement, bituminous 104 
 
 construction 99 
 
 features 99 
 
 rock asphalt 103 
 
 Brick pavements 133 
 
 brick, qualifications of good 133 
 
 brick-pavement, qualifications of 137 
 
 fillings, joint 139 
 
 foundation 137 
 
 hand tools used 145 
 
 heaters, gravel 146 
 
 laying, manner of 138 
 
 machine, concrete-mixing 145 
 
 sand cushion 137 
 
 test _ 136 
 
 Broken-stone road 85 
 
 compacting stone 93 
 
 construction 85 
 
 macadam and telford roads, suppression of dust on 95 
 
 quality 88 
 
 rock, testing 89 
 
 shape and size of stonea 92 
 
 species of stone _ 91 
 
 spreading stone 92 
 
 thickness of stones. _ 92 
 
INDEX 
 
 ^ PAGE 
 
 City streets and highways _ 113 
 
 arrangement 113 
 
 asphalt 153 
 
 brick _ 168 
 
 cleaning 172 
 
 drainage 119 
 
 foundations ^ 121 
 
 grades 114 
 
 pavement, miscellaneous 164 
 
 selecting 176 
 
 stone-block 123 
 
 street work, miscellaneous 166 
 
 transverse contour or crown 118 
 
 width .' 113 
 
 wood 147 
 
 City streets, foundations for 121 
 
 concrete 122 
 
 Concrete pavements 106 
 
 bituminous surface, with 108 
 
 block or cube 108 
 
 construction 106 
 
 joints, expansion 108 
 
 materials 1 107 
 
 reinforced-concrete 108 
 
 Country roads and boulevards 1 
 
 location 1 12 
 
 maintenance and improvement 110 
 
 methods, preliminary construction 35 
 
 nature-soil roads 74 
 
 vehicles, resistance to movement of 1 
 
 Country roads and boulevards, drainage of 38 
 
 ends from weather, protection of 42 
 
 fall, for 40 
 
 gutters . 43 
 
 hillside roads 45 
 
 location 39 
 
 materials 40 
 
 outlets 43 
 
 road gutters, inner and outer , 45 
 
 side ditches 43 
 
 silt 42 
 
 soils, nature of 39 
 
 springs in cuttings, treatment of 44 
 
 water breaks 46 
 
 Culverts 46 
 
 arch i 53 
 
 box.. 52 
 
INDEX 3 
 
 Culverts (Continued) PAGE 
 
 design, factors in 46 
 
 earthenware pipe 49 
 
 functions i__ 46 
 
 iron pipe 51 
 
 short span bridges used as 53 
 
 E 
 
 Earthwork 55 
 
 classification 57 
 
 cuts and fills, balancing 55 
 
 embankments, methods of forming 58 
 
 prosecution of 58 
 
 shrinkage in 57 
 
 slopes, side _ 55 
 
 tools 60 
 
 G 
 
 Grade problems 33 
 
 establishing a grade 34 
 
 level stretches 34 
 
 minimum '__ 33 
 
 undulating 33 
 
 Gravel roads 83 
 
 laying gravel 84 
 
 preparation of gravel 83 
 
 repair 85 
 
 L 
 
 Location of roads 12 
 
 instruments 14 
 
 object of 13 
 
 points to consider 13 
 
 reconnoissance 13 
 
 selection, final 22 
 
 elements entering into 22 
 
 grade problems 33 
 
 gradient 31 
 
 location, final 30 
 
 mountain roads, treatment of 26 
 
 profile, construction of ._ 31 
 
 repose, angle of 32 
 
 roads, alignment of 27 
 
 typical cases, treatment of 23 
 
 survey, preliminary 15 
 
 bridge site 22 
 
 features ^._ 15 
 
 map ,. 20 
 
 memoir _ 22 
 
 topography _ 15 
 
4 INDEX 
 
 M PAGE 
 
 Miscellaneous pavement 164 
 
 burnt clay 164 
 
 chert 164 
 
 clinker 165 
 
 iron 165 
 
 kleinpflaster 165 
 
 oyster-shell 164 
 
 petrolithic 165 
 
 slag 164 
 
 straw 164 
 
 trackways 165 
 
 Miscellaneous street work 166 
 
 curbstones and gutters 170 
 
 footpaths 166 
 
 foundation 167 
 
 materials ,. 167 
 
 slope, cross 167 
 
 surface 167 
 
 width _' - 167 
 
 Mountain roads, treatment of 26 
 
 N 
 
 Nature-soil roads 74 
 
 earth 74 
 
 sand 77 
 
 sand and gravel soils, application of oil to 78 
 
 sand-clay 77 
 
 R 
 
 Roads, maintenance and improvement of 110 
 
 broken-stone __ 109 
 
 improvement of existing roads 110 
 
 systems 110 
 
 traffic census _ 111 
 
 Roads with special coverings 79 
 
 foundations 79 
 
 materials 79 
 
 preparation __: 80 
 
 thickness _-- 79 
 
 types 81 
 
 road covering, elements of 79 
 
 surfaces, wearing 82 
 
 bituminous-macadam 99 
 
 broken-stone 85 
 
 classification 82 
 
 concrete 106 
 
 function.. -- 82 
 
INDEX 5 
 
 Roads with special coverings PAGE 
 
 surfaces, wearing (Continued) 
 
 gravel - --- 83 
 
 thickness 82 
 
 S 
 
 Selecting pavement - 176 
 
 benefit, economic 181 
 
 contracts - 187 
 
 cost of pavements, gross _ - 184 
 
 economics, relative 18 1 
 
 interests affected 177 
 
 problem involved in 177 
 
 qualifications 176 
 
 rank of pavements, comparative 185 
 
 specifications 185 
 
 Stone-block pavements 123 
 
 Belgian-block 125 
 
 blocks, dimensions of 127 
 
 blocks, manner of laying 127, 130 
 
 cobble-stone 125 
 
 cushion coat 129 
 
 foundation 129 
 
 granite-block 126 
 
 joints, filling for 130 
 
 materials 124 
 
 granite 124 
 
 limestone 125 
 
 sandstones 125 
 
 trap rock 125 
 
 ramming 130 
 
 stone pavement, steep grades on _ L 132 
 
 Street cleaning 172 
 
 methods 172 
 
 snow, removal of 175 
 
 sprinkling 176 
 
 Streets, drainage of 119 
 
 catch basins 120 
 
 gutters 119 
 
 surface 119 
 
 T 
 Table 
 
 different road materials, proportionate rise of center to width of car- 
 riageway 37 
 
 effects of grades a horse can draw on different pavements . 9 
 
 grades, methods of designating 32 
 
 gross loads for horse on different pavements 9 
 
 life of various pavements, terms of . ............. 180 
 
6 INDEX 
 
 Table (Continued) ' PAGE 
 
 loaded vehicles over inclined roads, data for 11 
 
 paving-brick manufacture, average composition of shales for 134 
 
 rank of pavements, comparative rank of 184 
 
 resistance due to gravity on different inclinations _* 5 
 
 resistance to traction on different pavements 178 
 
 resistance to traction on road surfaces 2 
 
 rise of pavement center above gutter for different paving materials 119 
 
 stones, specific gravity, weight, resistance to crushing, and absorptive 
 
 power of 124 
 
 street cleaning, rate and cost of 173 
 
 traction power of horses at different velocities 7 
 
 tractive power with time, variation of 8 
 
 traffic census 112 
 
 wind pressure for various vehicles _ 12 
 
 V 
 
 Vehicles, resistance to movement of 1 
 
 air, resistance of 12 
 
 friction, axle 11 
 
 power and gradients, tractive 7 
 
 traction, resistance to _ 1 
 
 W 
 
 Wood-block pavements 147 
 
 blocks, laying 149 
 
 creosoting 147 
 
 qualifications 152 
 
LD 21-100m-7,'33 
 

 
 3 C 5550 
 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY